mi_019-222_n

Intelligent Vortex Flowmeters
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

Master Instruction
MI 019-222
Release date June 22, 2022
pasupport.schneider-electric.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished
for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide
or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as is"
basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated,
serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this manual or on the equipment to warn of
potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that accompany this symbol to
avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences
arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction,
installation, and operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to
recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
MI 019-222 3
Table of Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................9
Reference Documents......................................................................................9
Terminology ...................................................................................................10
Communication Parameters............................................................................10
Operating Conditions...................................................................................... 11
Functional Specifications ................................................................................12
Response Time (Without Damping)............................................................12
Outputs....................................................................................................12
Pulse Output Specifications.......................................................................12
Power Supply Requirements .....................................................................13
Flowmeter Ranges ...................................................................................14
Nominal Flow Velocity Limits .....................................................................14
Reference K-Factor ..................................................................................14
Flowing K-Factor ......................................................................................14
Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor ....................................................15
K-Factor Bias ...........................................................................................15
Static Pressure Limits ...............................................................................15
Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure
Conditions) ..............................................................................................15
Pressure Tolerance...................................................................................16
Units .............................................................................................................16
FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application..................................................................23
Physical Specifications ...................................................................................23
Process Wetted Materials .........................................................................23
Housing Covers........................................................................................24
Environmental Protection ..........................................................................24
NACE Certification ...................................................................................24
Approximate Mass....................................................................................24
Maximum Working Pressure ...........................................................................26
Electrical Certifications ...................................................................................29
Installation .......................................................................................................32
Unpacking .....................................................................................................32
Flowmeter Identification..................................................................................34
Piping............................................................................................................35
Hydrostatic Piping Testing .........................................................................35
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance ..............................................35
Process Fluids ...............................................................................................36
Liquid Installations ....................................................................................36
Gas Installations.......................................................................................37
Steam Installations ...................................................................................38
Insulation.......................................................................................................39
Vibration........................................................................................................40
Ambient Temperature Limitations and Considerations .......................................40
Recommended Mounting Arrangements ....................................................41
Meter Servicing..............................................................................................42
MI 019-222 5
Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps.....................................................42

Installing the Flowmeter Body .........................................................................43
Flanged Body (84CF)................................................................................43
Wafer Body (84CW)..................................................................................45
NPT Body (84CN).....................................................................................46
Sanitary Body (84CS) ...............................................................................47
Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing .......................................................50
Cover Locks ..................................................................................................51
Positioning the Display ...................................................................................52
Setting the Write Protect Jumper .....................................................................52
Positioning the Housing ..................................................................................53
Electrical Installation.......................................................................................53
Field Termination Wiring............................................................................53
Remotely Mounted Electronics ..................................................................55
Loop Wiring .............................................................................................59
Wiring a Flowmeter with a Pulse Output .....................................................61
Multidrop Communication .........................................................................62
Operating the Flowmeter ...............................................................................64
Personalities..................................................................................................64
Flowmeter Functions and Actions ....................................................................66
Status ...........................................................................................................67
Setup ............................................................................................................68
Recommended Setup Procedure...............................................................69
Setting Fluid Parameters...........................................................................70
Setting Tuning Parameters........................................................................76
Setting Measurement Parameters..............................................................76
Setting Totalizer Parameters .....................................................................79
Setting Output Parameters ........................................................................82
Setting Piping Parameters.........................................................................92
Setting Flowtube Parameters ....................................................................94
Setting Advanced Options.........................................................................95
Resetting the Database.............................................................................96
Calibration and Test........................................................................................97
Calibration ...............................................................................................97
Test .........................................................................................................99
Pulse Actions............................................................................................... 100
Totalizer Actions........................................................................................... 100
Messages.................................................................................................... 101
Using the Local Display ............................................................................... 104
Local Display and Home Screen.................................................................... 104
Measurement .............................................................................................. 105
Using the Flowmeter Software....................................................................... 105
Using Passwords.................................................................................... 105
Activating an Edit, Pick List, or User Menu Block....................................... 108
Editing Numbers and Strings ................................................................... 108
Picking from a List .................................................................................. 108
Accessing the Menu System from the Home Screen ....................................... 109
6 MI 019-222
Configuration Example ................................................................................. 109

Configuring a User Fluid.......................................................................... 109
Configuring 4 to 20 mA Analog Output for Mass Flow ................................ 111
Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow................................................... 111
Displaying Total Mass ............................................................................. 112
Menus ......................................................................................................... 113
Menus for the General and Steam Personalities........................................ 113
Menus for the Oil & Gas Personality......................................................... 146
Using the HART Communicator ................................................................. 159
Setting Digital Measurement Values Remotely ............................................... 159
HART Communicator Menus ........................................................................ 162
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 175
Output Indicates Flow When There Is No Flow ............................................... 175
No Output with Flow ..................................................................................... 176
No or Low Output with Remotely Mounted Electronics .................................... 177
Testing the Electronics Module ................................................................ 178
Output Suddenly Drops ................................................................................ 179
Other Incorrect Output .................................................................................. 179
Setting the LFCI ........................................................................................... 181
Troubleshooting the Temperature Sensor....................................................... 181
Maintenance .................................................................................................. 182
Replacing the Electronics Module.................................................................. 184
Removing the Electronics Module............................................................ 184
Installing the Electronics Module.............................................................. 186
Replacing the Potted Neck Module ................................................................ 187
Removing the Potted Neck Module .......................................................... 188
Installing the Potted Neck Module ............................................................ 188
Replacing the Preamplifier ............................................................................ 190
Removing the Preamplifier ...................................................................... 191
Installing the Preamplifier ........................................................................ 191
Replacing the Sensor ................................................................................... 192
Replacing or Adding a Digital Display/Configurator ......................................... 192
Model Code ................................................................................................... 193
Flanged Body Style ...................................................................................... 193
Wafer Body Style ......................................................................................... 197
NPT (Threaded) Body Style .......................................................................... 200
Sanitary Body Style ...................................................................................... 203
Nominal Dimensions .................................................................................... 205
Dimensions for 84C Flanged Body Flowmeters .............................................. 205
Dimensions for 84C Wafer Body Flowmeters.................................................. 210
Dimensions for 84C NPT Body Flowmeters.................................................... 212
Dimensions for 84C Sanitary Flowmeters....................................................... 214
Parts List ........................................................................................................ 216
Electronics Housing...................................................................................... 216
Junction Box and Remote Mounting .............................................................. 219
Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts............................................................... 223
MI 019-222 7
Optional Cable Selections -P and -R.............................................................. 227

Tamper-Resistant Cover for Bonnet Bolts (Option -S)...................................... 228
Recommended Spare Parts Summary........................................................... 229
8 MI 019-222
Introduction Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Introduction
Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters measure the flow rates of fluids (liquid, gas, or steam)
using the principle of vortex shedding. Fluid flowing through the flowmeter body
passes a specially shaped vortex shedder that causes vortices to form and shed
alternately from the sides of the shedder at a rate proportional to the flow rate of the
fluid. These shedding vortices create an alternating differential pressure that is
sensed by a detector located above the shedder. A pulsed voltage is generated by the
detector with a frequency that is synchronous with the vortex shedding frequency.
This signal is then conditioned by an electronics module and processed by a
microcontroller to produce a digital signal, a 4 to 20 mA analog signal (Electronics
Version -T only), and a pulse signal that is proportional to the volumetric flow rate.
These signals can be mapped to a variety of measurements.
All flowmeters, except Sanitary, are available with an optional integrated platinum
RTD temperature sensor, which allows temperature compensation for density of
saturated steam. With built-in ASME-based steam tables,1 a Model 84C Vortex
Flowmeter with the temperature compensation option performs mass flow metering of
saturated steam, including specific enthalpy (heat content) and rate of heat flow.
In addition, a Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter with the RTD option provides algorithms
for temperature-compensated mass flow of any user-defined liquid.
The flowmeter is offered with a flanged (84CF), wafer (84CW), NPT male threaded
(84CN), or sanitary (84CS) body design.
The flowmeter can be configured locally or remotely. If your flowmeter has an optional
LCD display, pushbuttons allow you to easily configure the flowmeter locally. To
configure the flowmeter remotely, use either a HART Communicator or a PC-based
configurator.
The Low Power (Electronics Version -L) version of this flowmeter is intended for use
with battery power that is recharged with any technology, such as a solar array or
alternator. The supply current is fixed at a constant 10 mA and remains in operation
down to a minimum terminal voltage of 10 V dc.
Reference Documents
Document Description
MI 019-222 Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

MI 019-224 Model 84C with Modbus Communication
MI 019-177 Vortex Flowmeter FM and CSA Connection Diagrams
MI 019-179 Flow Products Safety Information (ATEX and IECEx)
1. Saturated steam based on ASME International Steam Tables for Industrial Use (Second Edition), 2009.
MI 019-222 9
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Introduction
Terminology
This section defines terms that are used throughout this document.
Term Description
Soft Limits The maximum and minimum limits within which a measurement is expected to
operate. These limits are based on the user-entered upper range value (URV) for
each measurement. Measurement values that are outside the soft limits, but within
the hard limits, are typically marked as alerts.
Hard Limits The maximum and minimum limits that a measurement cannot exceed.
Measurement values that are outside the hard limits are typically marked as bad.
Model Code The model code defines the options associated with a product.
Figure 1 - Sample Model Code
84CF010–TPRF1STFTJFA
FA: FM Intrinsically Safe Certification
J: With Optional Digital Indicator/Configurator
T: Aluminum Integral 1/2-NPT Conduit Connections
F: Fluorolube fill, Standard Temperature Range, SS
T: Multivariable Temperature Compensation
S: Single Measurement
F1: ANSI Class 150 RF End Connection and Flange Rating
R: 316SS Body, Flange, and Shedder Bar Material
P: Standard Pulse Output Capability
T: HART Electronics
010: 1 inch (DN25, 25 mm) Nominal Line Size
F: Flanged Body Style
Communication Parameters
Table 1 - HART Communication Parameters
Parameter HART Analog or Digital Multidrop Mode
Communication Format • Analog 4 to 20 mA with HART superimposed

• HART communications with fixed mA output
Remote Configurator/Communicator HART communicator or PC-based configurator
Communication Rate 1200 baud

Communication Distance (Rated) 1,800 m (6,000 ft)
Measurement Update 5 times/s
Raw Pulse Measurement Update Vortex Shedding Frequency
With HART, digital multidropping — the connection of multiple transmitters to a single

communications line — is permitted.
10 MI 019-222
Operating Conditions
Operating limits are based on nonflashing, noncavitating conditions. A minimum
positive back pressure is required for proper operation to avoid these effects.
Table 2 - Operating Limits
Influence Operating Limits
Process Fluid liquid, gas, and steam
Process Temperature for Standard Temperature Flowmeters
With fluorolube fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F)
Material selection D or F)
With silicone fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F)
Material selection R or S)
With Neobee® M20 fill (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range and -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F)
Material selection C)
(Only available for sanitary flowmeter body)
Process Temperature for Extended Temperature Flowmeters
Unfilled (Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and Material 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F)
selection A or B), without temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection N)
selection E or G) without temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection N)
selection A, B, E, or G) with temperature compensation
(Multivariable selection T)
Ambient Temperature (Housing)2
With local display -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)
Without local display -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F)
Relative Humidity 0 and 100%
Supply Voltage
With Electronics Version -T (HART Communication) 15.75 and 42 V dc3
With Electronics Version -L (Low Power) 10 and 42 V dc4
2. The 80°C (176°C) temperature is extended to 85°C (185°F) with certain electrical certifications. Refer to Electrical Certifications, page 29.
3. See Supply Voltage vs Output Load for 4 to 20 mA Output, page 13.
4. Supply current is fixed at a constant 10 mA for Electronics Version -L and remains in operation down to a minimum terminal voltage of
10 V dc.
MI 019-222 11
Functional Specifications
Response Time (Without Damping)
Table 3 - Flowmeter Response Times
Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)
Analog Mode 0.5 second or the vortex shedding period for frequencies less than 2 Hz.
Digital Mode 0.5 second or the vortex shedding period for frequencies less than 2 Hz.
Pulse Output • Raw mode: Vortex shedding frequency

• Frequency or Pulse mode: 0.25 second or the vortex shedding period for
frequencies less than 2 Hz.
Outputs
These flowmeters support the following outputs:
• HART Electronics Version -T: Digital and 4 to 20 mA output and pulse output
• Low Power Version -L: Fixed 10 mA output and pulse output
Table 4 - Flowmeter Outputs
Output Type Description
Analog (HART Flow rate available as a 4 to 20 mA signal, with the 20 mA value being set by
flowmeters only) the configured full range flow rate. See Supply Voltage vs Output Load for 4 to
20 mA Output, page 13.
Digital Digital information is superimposed on a 4 to 20 mA output signal (standard

power HART flowmeters) or the power supply loop (low power flowmeters) at
1200 baud. See HART Communication Parameters, page 10. For low power
versions, output is fixed at 10 mA.
Pulse Output The pulse output can be configured with the electronics module in one of the
following modes:
• Raw Mode: The vortex shedding frequency is directly passed through,
providing an instantaneous, nondamped frequency output.
• Frequency mode: The frequency of this output is a 50% duty cycle
pulse output with a frequency range of 0 to 10,000 Hz, proportional to
zero flow to the full range flow rate/upper range value (URV).
• Pulse mode: The frequency of this output is also a 50% duty cycle pulse
output that is configured to provide a pulse when a determined
volumetric/totalized unit has flowed through the meter.
Output Combinations
The flowmeter uses two combined power and digital communications lines. Pulse
output requires wiring an additional two lines.
Pulse Output Specifications

The pulse output is an externally powered 2-wire transistor switch type output. This
output can be configured using any applicable configuration device to select one of
three pulse output modes: raw, frequency, and pulse. The following specifications
apply to the three types of pulse output modes:
• Isolated 2-wire transistor switch
12 MI 019-222
• Applied voltage: 5 to 30 V dc
• Maximum “ON” state voltage drop: 1.0 V dc
• Maximum “ON” state current: 20 mA dc
• Reverse polarity protected
• Short circuit protected
• Connectable to pull-up and pull-down counters
Power Supply Requirements

HART (Electronics Version -T)
Supply Current:
• Digital Mode: 10 mA dc nominal
• Analog Mode: 22 mA dc maximum
• Pulse Output: 20 mA dc maximum
Supply Voltage:
• 15.75 to 42 V dc, depending on electrical safety approvals and certifications5.
Refer to the following figure.
NOTE: When operating at ambient temperatures less than -29°C (-20°F), you
must maintain a minimum terminal voltage of 15.75 V dc in order to maintain
remote configurator communication capability.
Figure 2 - Supply Voltage vs Output Load for 4 to 20 mA Output

1400
1200
OUTPUT LOAD, W
1000
MINIMUM LOAD
800 WITH
CONFIGURATOR 30 V MAXIMUM FOR
OR INTRINSICALLY
600 COMMUNICATOR SAFE UNITS.
SEE NOTE 2.
400
250
200
227.5 W @ 17.7 V SEE NOTE 1 BELOW
0
15 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
SUPPLY VOLTAGE, V dc
NOTES:
1. The flowmeter will function with an output load less than 250 Ω, provided that a
PC-based configurator or HART Communicator is not connected to it. Connecting
a PC-based configurator or HART Communicator while operating in this area can
cause output and/or communication disturbances.
2. With intrinsically safe certifications with a 24 V dc power supply, an active barrier
is required.
Low Power (Electronics Version -L)

Supply Current:
• 10 mA dc nominal
5. See Electrical Certifications, page 29
MI 019-222 13
Supply Voltage:
• 10 and 42 V dc6
NOTE: For proper operation, 10 V dc must be maintained at the flowmeter
terminals. For HART communication, a 250 Ω load resistor must be included in the
power supply loop, and a voltage of 12.5 V dc must be maintained in the loop.
Flowmeter Ranges
The flowmeter is shipped with the flow range specified in the sales order or with a
default flow range equal to the meter capacity. You can rerange the flowmeter and
keep the same flow rate units, choose new flow rate units from a built-in menu-
selectable list, or enter custom flow rate units.
To determine flow velocity limits and use other sizing tools, refer to the FlowExpertPro
sizing program.
Nominal Flow Velocity Limits

Although the calculations in the following table apply for many applications, they
provide only nominal flow velocity limits. Use the FlowExpertPro™ sizing program for
your specific application.
Standard Temperature Range7 High Temperature Range8

Range Limit m/s ft/s m/s ft/s
Lower 3.0/√ρf 2.5/√ρf 6.0/√ρf 5.0/√ρf
Upper 300/√ρf 250/√ρf 300/√ρf 250/√ρf
Reference K-Factor
The reference K-factor is a coefficient that specifies the flowmeter calibration and is
expressed as pulses per unit volume; where pulses/unit volume = pulses per second
divided by volume flow per second.
The reference K-factor is the arithmetic mean value of K over the factory-calibrated
flow range. It is determined at the factory by actual flow calibration with water by
comparison to a master flowmeter calibration, or by actual static weight. Both
calibrations are traceable to NIST. The reference K-factor is entered in the flowmeter
database and stamped on the data plate. Once established, this K-factor is available
to gas, liquid, or steam.
Flowing K-Factor
The flowing K-factor is computed from the K-reference expressed in specified flowing
units, and can be corrected for the following:
• Process Temperature
• Mating Pipe
10 V dc.
7. Applies to flanged, wafer, NPT, and sanitary body styles.
8. Applies to flanged, wafer, and NPT body styles.
14 MI 019-222
• Upstream Disturbances
Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor

There is an effect on the reference K-factor due to a diameter change of the flowtube
bore with temperature. The effect is -0.3% of flow rate per 55°C (100°F) increase in
temperature. These flowmeters automatically recompute a flowing K-factor based on
detected changes in process temperature.
K-Factor Bias
Provisions are made in the configuration menu to bias the flowmeter K-factor by a
percent (%) value. The flowing K-factor value is automatically recalculated when the
% bias is entered.
Static Pressure Limits

To determine the pressure drop for Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters and use other
sizing tools, refer to the FlowExpertPro sizing program (FlowExpertPro™ Sizing
Application, page 23).
Minimum Static Pressure

The minimum static pressure is that pressure which is sufficient to help prevent
flashing and meet the pressure drop requirements to attain maximum flow rate. Refer
to the FlowExpertPro sizing program.
Maximum Static Pressure

Where reference temperature is 37.8°C (100°F):
• Flanged Body: 3750 psig (258.6 bar, 25855 kPa) or that imposed by flange rating
• Wafer Body: 1500 psig (103.4 bar, 10340 kPa) or that imposed by flange rating
• NPT Body as imposed by equivalent flange ratings:
◦ Line size 010 equivalent to Class 1500 flanges
◦ Line size 020 equivalent to Class 900 flanges
• Sanitary Body as imposed by process piping:
◦ Line size DN50 (2 in): 1,725 kPa (250 psi)
◦ Line size DN80 (3 in): 1,035 kPa (150 psi)
Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure

Conditions)
Proper system design, and operation of the flowmeter within the rated flow rate range,
helps prevent conditions that tend to contribute to the release of vapor from the liquid
(flashing), which can also induce cavitation.
MI 019-222 15
When locating the flowmeter, consider the need for a back pressure valve, or for
increasing inlet pressure. To help minimize flashing and support stable vortex
generation, the minimum back pressure should be:
PG = (3)(ΔP) + (1.25)(pv) – (patm)
Where:
• PG: Gauge pressure in kPa or psi five pipe diameters downstream of the
flowmeter
• ΔP: Pressure loss in psi or kPa
• pv: Vapor pressure at line conditions in psi or kPa absolute
• patm: Atmospheric pressure in psi or kPa absolute
Pressure Tolerance
Flowmeters are designed to withstand pressure within ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150,
300, 600, 900, or 1500 flange ratings, and DIN EN 10921 PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63,
PN100, or PN160 flange ratings. See Maximum Working Pressure, page 26 for flange
pressure-temperature ratings.
For 84C wafer body flowmeters, the flowtube face outside diameter is designed to
center between ANSI Class 150 flanges. For other flange ratings, specify centering
spacers from the Mounting and Centering System selection in the Model Code.
Units
Table 5 - Analog Units
Unit Description Fluid Restriction

% percent of 4 to 20 (0 to 100%) No restriction
mA milliamperes No restriction
Norm Normalized (0-1) No restriction
Table 6 - Absolute Pressure Units

kPaa kilopascals absolute No restriction
Paa pascals absolute No restriction
psia pounds per square inch absolute No restriction
Table 7 - Temperature Units

degC degrees Celsius No restriction
degF degrees Fahrenheit No restriction
degR degrees Rankine No restriction
K Kelvins No restriction
16 MI 019-222
Table 8 - Density Units

g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter No restriction
kg/l kilograms per liter No restriction
kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter No restriction
lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot No restriction
lb/gal pounds per US gallon No restriction
lb/Yd3 pounds per cubic yard No restriction
LT/Yd3 long tons per cubic yard No restriction
oz/in3 ounces per cubic inch No restriction
ST/Yd3 short tons per cubic yard No restriction
Table 9 - Mass Rate Units

g/d grams per day No restriction
g/h grams per hour No restriction
g/m grams per minute No restriction
g/s grams per second No restriction
kg/d kilograms per day No restriction
kg/h kilograms per hour No restriction
kg/m kilograms per minute No restriction
kg/s kilograms per second No restriction
lb/d pounds per day No restriction
lb/h pounds per hour No restriction
lb/m pounds per minute No restriction
lb/s pounds per second No restriction
LTon/d long tons (2240 lb) per day No restriction
LTon/h long tons (2240 lb) per hour No restriction
LTon/m long tons (2240 lb) per minute No restriction
mTon/d metric tons per day No restriction
mTon/h metric tons per hour No restriction
mTon/m metric tons per minute No restriction
mTon/s metric tons per second No restriction
oz/d ounces per day No restriction
oz/h ounces per hour No restriction
oz/m ounces per minute No restriction
oz/s ounces per second No restriction
STon/d short tons (2000 lb) per day No restriction
STon/h short tons (2000 lb) per hour No restriction
MI 019-222 17
Table 9 - Mass Rate Units (Continued)

STon/m short tons (2000 lb) per minute No restriction
STon/s short tons (2000 lb) per second No restriction
Table 10 - Volume Rate Units

bbl/d barrels (42 US gallons) per day Liquids only
bbl/h barrels (42 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
bbl/m barrels (42 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
bbl/s barrels (42 US gallons) per second Liquids only
bbl3/d barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day Liquids only
bbl3/h barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
bbl3/m barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
bbl3/s barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second Liquids only
ft3/d cubic feet per day No restriction
ft3/h cubic feet per hour No restriction
ft3/m cubic feet per minute No restriction
ft3/s cubic feet per second No restriction
gal/d US gallons per day Liquids only
gal/h US gallons per hour Liquids only
gal/m US gallons per minute Liquids only
gal/s US gallons per second Liquids only
Igal/d imperial gallons per day Liquids only
Igal/h imperial gallons per hour Liquids only
Igal/m imperial gallons per minute Liquids only
Igal/s imperial gallons per second Liquids only
l/d liters per day Not for vapor
l/h liters per hour Not for vapor
l/m liters per minute Not for vapor
l/s liters per second Not for vapor
m3/d cubic meters per day No restriction
m3/h cubic meters per hour No restriction
m3/m cubic meters per minute No restriction
m3/s cubic meters per second No restriction
mcft/d thousands of cubic feet per day No restriction
Mgal/d millions of US gallons per day Liquids only
Ml/d millions of liters per day Not for vapor
Ml/h millions of liters per hour Not for vapor
mmcft/d millions of cubic feet per day No restriction
18 MI 019-222
Table 11 - Standard Volume Rate Units

mmScft/d millions of standard cubic feet per day Not for vapor
mScft/d thousands of standard cubic feet per day Not for vapor
Sbbl/d standard barrels (42 US gallons) per day Liquids only
Sbbl/h standard barrels (42 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
Sbbl/m standard barrels (42 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
Sbbl/s standard barrels (42 US gallons) per second Liquids only
Sbl3/d standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per day Liquids only
Sbl3/h standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per hour Liquids only
Sbl3/m standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per minute Liquids only
Sbl3/s standard barrels (31.5 US gallons) per second Liquids only
Sft3/d standard cubic feet per day (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/h standard cubic feet per hour (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/m standard cubic feet per minute (US system) Not for vapor
Sft3/s standard cubic feet per second (US system) Not for vapor
Sgal/d standard US gallons per day Liquids only
Sgal/h standard US gallons per hour Liquids only
Sgal/m standard US gallons per minute Liquids only
Sgal/s standard US gallons per second Liquids only
Sm3/d standard cubic meters per day Not for vapor
Sm3/h standard cubic meters per hour Not for vapor
Sm3/m standard cubic meters per minute Not for vapor
Sm3/s standard cubic meters per second Not for vapor
Table 12 - Normal Volume Rate Units

Nft3/s normal cubic feet per second Not for vapor
Ngal/d normal US gallons per day Liquids only
Ngal/h normal US gallons per hour Liquids only
Ngal/m normal US gallons per minute Liquids only
Ngal/s normal US gallons per second Liquids only
Nl/d normal liters per day (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/h normal liters per hour (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/m normal liters per minute (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nl/s normal liters per second (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/d normal cubic meters per day (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/h normal cubic meters per hour (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/m normal cubic meters per minute (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3/s normal cubic meters per second (MKS System) Not for vapor
MI 019-222 19
Table 13 - Mass Units

g grams No restriction
kg kilograms No restriction
lb pounds No restriction
LTon long tons (2240 lb) No restriction
mTon metric tons No restriction

oz ounces No restriction
STon short tons (2000 lb) No restriction
Table 14 - Volume Units

bbl liquid barrels (42 US gallons) No restriction
bbl3 liquid barrels (31.5 US gallons) No restriction
ft3 cubic feet No restriction

gal gallons No restriction
Igal imperial gallons No restriction
l liters No restriction
m3 cubic meters No restriction
mcft thousands of cubic feet No restriction
Mgal millions of US gallons No restriction
Ml millions of liters No restriction
mmcft millions of cubic feet No restriction
Table 15 - Standard Volume Units

mmScft millions of cubic feet No restriction
mScft thousands of cubic feet No restriction
SBBL standard liquid barrel (42 U.S. gallons) Not for vapor
SBL3 standard liquid barrel (31.5 U.S. gallons) Not for vapor
Sft3 standard cubic feet Not for vapor
Sgal standard US gallons Liquids only
Sm3 standard cubic meters Not for vapor
Table 16 - Normal Volume Units

Nft3 normal cubic feet Not for vapor
Ngal normal US gallons Liquids only
Nl normal liters (MKS System) Not for vapor
Nm3 normal cubic meters (MKS System) Not for vapor
20 MI 019-222
Table 17 - Velocity Units

ft/d feet per day No restriction
ft/h feet per hour No restriction
ft/m feet per minute No restriction
ft/s feet per second No restriction
m/d meters per day No restriction
m/h meters per hour No restriction
m/m meters per minute No restriction
m/s meters per second No restriction
Table 18 - Absolute Viscosity Units

cPoise centipoise No restriction
PaSec pascal seconds No restriction
Table 19 - Heat Content Units

BTU/lb British thermal units per pound No restriction
J/kg joules per kilogram No restriction
KJ/kg kilojoules per kilogram No restriction
MCal/kg megacalories per kilogram No restriction
Table 20 - Energy Units

BTU British thermal units9 No restriction
J joules No restriction
MCal megacalories10 No restriction
MJ megajoules No restriction
Table 21 - Heat Flow Units

BTU/h British thermal units per hour9 No restriction
J/s joules per second No restriction
MCal/h megacalories per hour10 No restriction
MJ/h megajoules per hour No restriction
9. 1 BTU = 0.2519958 kcal.

10. 1 calorie = 4.184 joules.
MI 019-222 21
Table 22 - K-Factor Units

m3/p cubic meters per pulse No restriction
p/ft3 pulses per cubic foot No restriction
p/l pulses per liter No restriction
Table 23 - Miscellaneous Units
Measurement Unit Description Fluid Restriction

Frequency Hz hertz No restriction
Pulse Pulse pulses No restriction
Resistance ohms ohms No restriction

Potential Volt volts No restriction
22 MI 019-222
FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application

The FlowExpertPro application helps with flowmeter type selection as well as
flowmeter sizing. In addition, the FlowExpertPro application offers:
• A large library of the physical properties of typical process fluids.
• Tabular and graphic presentation of results.
• Options to save, print, and email results.
• Access to applicable flowmeter PSS documents and related documentation.
The program calculates minimum and maximum flow rates, rangeability, pressure
loss, and Reynolds Number, using established flow equations. It also allows for
material and flange selection, and provides ANSI and DIN flange recommendations
for predicted flow pressure and temperature.
You can access this tool at the free website www.FlowExpertPro.com, or on a mobile
device with the iOS or Android operating system.
Website
App Store (Apple®) Google Play™ Store (Android®)
www.FlowExpertPro.com
Contact Global Customer Support for further information and technical support.
Physical Specifications
Process Wetted Materials
Parts 84CF (Flanged) 84CW (Wafer) 84CN (NPT) 84CS (Sanitary)
Body and Cast 316 ss Cast 316 ss Cast 316 ss Tube: 316/316L ss
Shedder Bar (CF8M) (CF8M) (CF8M) Shedder Bar:
or 304 ss or nickel alloy11 316L ss
(CW2M) (ASTM 276)
End Connection 316 ss N/A cast 316 ss 316 ss

or 304 ss (CF8M)
Sensor Seals 316 ss, N/A

316 ss/grafoil,
nickel alloy11 (CW2M),
or nickel alloy11 (CW2M)/grafoil
Detector 316 ss or nickel alloy12 316 ss

Diaphragm
11. Equivalent to Hastelloy® C-4C. Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
12. Equivalent to Hastelloy®.
MI 019-222 23
Housing Covers
A two compartment housing separates the electronics from the field connections.
Housing and covers are low copper (0.6% maximum) die-cast aluminum alloy with an
epoxy finish. O-ring seals are used to seal the housing covers, housing neck, and
terminal block.
Environmental Protection
The electronics housing has the dust tight and weatherproof rating of IP66 as defined
by IEC 60529, and provides the environmental and corrosion resistant protection
rating of NEMA Type 4X.
NACE Certification
The Model 84C flowmeters have been designed to meet the requirements of NACE
Standard MR-0175-2003 for use in H2S Sour Oilfield environments. The design and
process wetted materials also comply with NACE Standard MR-0103-2007 for use in
corrosive petroleum refining environments. A NACE compliance certificate is available
by selecting model code option -Q option. See PSS 1-8A8 A and Model Code, page
193 for more information.
Approximate Mass
The following tables list masses of different configurations of 84C flowmeters. The
mass values shown are approximate and are meant as a guide.
Standard temperature flowmeter masses are listed for integrally mounted electronics
housings. There is a slight difference in mass for high temperature flowmeters, which
adds about 0.5 kg (1 lb), and for remote mounted housings (where the housing is
replaced by a connector head assembly and junction box). The electronics housing
itself weighs about 2 kg (4 lb) and varies slightly depending on whether the flowmeter
is equipped with the indicator/configurator or the extended housing covers.
Table 24 - Approximate Mass of Model 84C Flanged Flowmeters
Nominal Line Size Flange Specifications Mass
Model Code Size Type Material kg lb
008 0.75 in Class 150 316 ss 4.71 10.4

Class 1500 8.75 19.3
010 1 in Class 150 316 ss 5.53 12.2
Class 1500 11.02 24.3
015 1.5 in Class 150 316 ss 7.57 16.7
Class 1500 15.65 34.5
020 2 in Class 150 316 ss 9.48 20.9
Class 1500 24.58 54.2
030 3 in Class 150 316 ss 19.5 43
Class 1500 49.76 109.7
040 4 in Class 150 316 ss 21.05 46.4
Class 1500 70.72 155.9
24 MI 019-222
Table 24 - Approximate Mass of Model 84C Flanged Flowmeters (Continued)
Nominal Line Size Flange Specifications Mass
Model Code Size Type Material kg lb
060 6 in Class 150 316 ss 35.2 77.6

Class 600 77.92 178.1
Class 1500 161.93 357
080 8 in Class 150 316 ss 57.74 127.3
Class 600 131.26 289.4
Class 1500 298.1 657.2
100 10 in Class 150 304 ss 72.57 160
Class 600 216 476.2
120 12 in Class 150 304 ss 114.48 252.4
Class 600 245.12 540.4
008 DN15 PN40 316 ss 5.58 12.3
PN100 7.35 16.2
010 DN25 PN40 316 ss 6.08 13.4
PN160 8.66 19.1
015 DN40 PN40 316 ss 8.12 17.9
PN160 12.79 28.2
020 DN50 PN40 316 ss 9.84 21.7
PN160 17.42 38.4
030 DN80 PN40 316 ss 15.1 33.3
PN160 26.58 58.6
040 DN100 PN40 316 ss 20.14 44.4
PN160 36.83 81.2
060 DN150 PN16 316 ss 27.89 61.5
PN160 88.81 195.8
080 DN200 PN16 316 ss 43 94.8
PN160 161.79 356.7
100 DN250 PN16 304 ss 65.13 143.6
PN100 191.23 421.6
120 DN300 PN16 304 ss 92.71 204.4
PN100 280.32 618
Table 25 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Wafer Flowmeters with 316 ss Body
Material
Nominal Line Size Mass
Model Code mm in kg lb
008 DN15 0.75 2.3 5

010 DN25 1 2.7 6
015 DN40 1.5 3.2 7
020 DN50 2 4.5 10
030 DN80 3 8 18
040 DN100 4 11.5 25
MI 019-222 25
Table 25 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Wafer Flowmeters with 316 ss Body
Material (Continued)
Nominal Line Size Mass
060 DN150 6 16 35
080 DN2000 8 27 60
Table 26 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C NPT Flowmeters
Nominal Line Size Weight
010 DN25 1 2.7 6

020 DN50 2 4.5 10
Table 27 - Approximate Mass for Model 84C Sanitary Flowmeters
Weight with Connection C0 or

Nominal Line Size Flowmeter T013
Description
020 DN50 2 Body and 0.7 1.6

Cable
Housing and 4.1 6.5
Bracket
Total 4.8 8.1
030 DN80 3 Body and 1.1 2.5
Cable
Housing and 4.1 6.5
Bracket
Total 5.2 9.0
Maximum Working Pressure

The maximum working pressure (MWP) of the flowmeter at 38°C (100°F) is shown on
the data label.
Flanged Body Flowmeters

The MWP at various temperatures for a flanged body flowmeter is shown in the
following graphs. To identify the applicable chart, refer to the model code printed on
the data label for the nominal line size, flange material, and end connection type
(flange rating):
13. See Model Code table for sanitary body.
26 MI 019-222
84CF020-TPR F1...
END CONNECTIONS
(F1=ANSI Class 150)
BODY AND FLANGE MATERIAL

(R=316 ss Flanges for 2" Line Size)
NOMINAL LINE SIZE

(020=2 inches)
Refer to Model Code, page 193 for an explanation of these codes.
Figure 3 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 316 ss ANSI Flanges, Line Sizes 008 to 040 (3/4 to 4 Inches), per
ASME B16.5, Group 2.2 Materials
200°F 400°F 800°F
Fluorolube Silicone Extended
sensor sensor temp. limit
4000 limit limit (no fill)
CL 1500
3600
3500
ANSI Flanges, 316 ss

3000
PROCESS PRESSURE (psig)
2500
CL 900
2160 2110
2000
CL 600
1440 1500
1265
1000
CL 300 845
720
500
CL 150 420
275
80
0
-20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °F
MI 019-222 27
Figure 4 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 304 ss ANSI Flanges, Line Sizes 060 to 120 (6 to 12 inches), per
ASME B16.5, Group 2.1 Materials
200°F 400°F 800°F
4000 limit limit (no fill)
CL 1500
3600
3500
ANSI Flanges, 304 ss

3000
PROCESS PRESSURE (psig)
2500
CL 900
2160
2000 2030
CL 600
1440 1500
1215
1000
CL 300 810
720
500
CL 150 405
275
0 80
-20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °F
Figure 5 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 316 ss Metric Flanges, Line Sizes 008 to 040 (DN15 to DN100), per
EN 1092-1, Material Group 14E0
90°C 200°C 430°C
limit limit (no fill)
180
PN160
160 Metric Flanges, 316 ss
140
120
PROCESS PRESSURE (barg)
108.6
PN100
100
80
PN63 67.8
60
PN40 42.7
40
PN25
27.1
20 16.9
PN16 10.8
0
-10 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 430
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °C
28 MI 019-222
Figure 6 - Pressure Ratings for Welded 304 ss Metric Flanges, Line Sizes 060 to 120 (DN150 to DN300), per
EN 1092-1, Material Group 10E0
90°C 200°C 430°C
limit limit (no fill)
180
PN160
160 Metric Flanges, 304 ss
140
120
PROCESS PRESSURE (barg)
PN100
100
86.7
80
PN63
60
54.2
PN40
40
34.1
PN25
20 21.6
13.5
PN16 8.6
0
-10 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 430
PROCESS TEMPERATURE, °C
Wafer Body Flowmeters

The wafers are designed for a maximum PN100 (ANSI Class 600) working pressure.
NPT Flowmeters
For line size code 010, the pressure rating is comparable ANSI Class 1500.
For line size code 020, the pressure rating is comparable to ANSI Class 900.
Sanitary Body Flowmeter

Sanitary Body as imposed by process piping:
• Line size DN50 (2 in): 1,725 kPa (250 psi) at 37.8°C (100°F)
• Line size DN80 (3 in): 1,035 kPa (150 psi) at 37.8°C (100°F)
Electrical Certifications
These flowmeters have been designed to meet the electrical safety descriptions listed
in the following table. For detailed information or status of testing laboratory
approvals/certifications, contact Global Customer Support.
• Refer to MI 019-177 for FM and CSA connection diagrams.
MI 019-222 29
• Refer to MI 019-179 for ATEX and IECEx information.

NOTE: For Electronics Version -T with and intrinsically safe approvals and
certifications with a 24 V dc supply, an active barrier is required.
Table 28 - Electrical Certifications
Model
Agency Certification, Types of Protection, and Area Classification Application Conditions Code
Option
ATEX Intrinsically Safe: II 1G; II 2D; Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Sira 06ATEX2067X

ATEX Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T103°C Db Temperature Class T4; Ta = -40° to +80°C AA
ATEX Flameproof
Integral Electronics: II 2G; II 2D; Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb Sira 06ATEX2067X
Remote Electronics: II 2 (1) G; II 2D; Ex db [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C AD
ATEX Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
INMETRO Intrinsically Safe: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga

Temperature Class: -40°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C BA
INMETRO Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T103°C Db
INMETRO Flameproof
Integral Electronics: Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb
Temperature Class: -20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C BD14
Remote Electronics: Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb
INMETRO Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
CSA Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F,

and G; Temperature Class T4; Ta = -40° to +80°C CA
Also Zone certified intrinsically safe Ex ia IIC T4; IP66, Type 4X; Dual Seal
CSA Explosionproof with IS sensor connection for Class I, Div. 1,

Groups B, C, and D;
Temperature Class T5; Ta = 60°C (divisions)
CSA Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G; CD
Temperature Class T5; Ta = -40° to +80°C (zones)
Class III Div. 1;
Also Zone certified Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb; Dual Seal
CSA Division 2: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, and D;

Class II, Div. 2, Groups F and G; Temperature Class T4; Ta = 80°C CN
Class III, Div. 2; Type 4X; Dual Seal
IECEx Intrinsically Safe: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga

Temperature Class T4; Ta = -40° to +80°C EA
IECEx Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T103°C Db
IECEx Flameproof
Integral Electronics: Ex db ia IIC T4 Gb
Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C ED
Remote Electronics: Ex db [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb
IECEx Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
FM Intrinsically Safe: Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G;

Temperature Class T4; Ta = 80°C FA
Also Zone approved AEx ia IIC T4
FM Explosionproof with IS sensor connection for Class I, Div.1, Groups

B, C, and D;
Temperature Class T5; Ta = 85°C FD
FM Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G;
Class III, Div. 1; T5
FM Nonincendive: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, and D;

Class II, Div. 2, Groups F and G; Temperature Class T4; Ta = 80°C FN
Class III, Div. 2; T4
KCs Flameproof
Integral Electronics: Ex d [ia] ia IIC T4 Gb Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C KD15
Remote Electronics: Ex d [ia] IIC T4 Gb
NEPSI Intrinsically Safe: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga

Temperature Class T4; Ta = -40° to +80°C NA
NEPSI Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tD A21 IP66 T103°C
NEPSI Flameproof
Integral Electronics: Ex d ia IIC T4 Gb
Temperature Class T4; Ta = -20° to +80°C ND14
Remote Electronics: Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb
NEPSI Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tD A21 IP66 T85°C
14. Contact Global Customer Support for availability.

15. Contact Global Customer Support for availability for body styles 84CN and 84CS..
30 MI 019-222
Table 28 - Electrical Certifications (Continued)
Model
Agency Certification, Types of Protection, and Area Classification Application Conditions Code
Option
EAC Intrinsically Safe: 0Ex ia IIC T4 Ga X

Temperature Class: -40°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C RA
EAC Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T103°C Db X
EAC Flameproof
Integral Electronics – 1Ex d [ia Ga] ia IIC T4 Gb X
Temperature Class: -20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C RD16
Remote Electronics – 1Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb X
EAC Dust Ignition Protection: Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db X
CE mark only; PED controls and records n/a YY
No CE mark; Do not install in European Union countries n/a ZZ
MI 019-222 31
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Installation
Installation
Process Fluid Warnings
WARNING
HAZARD OF ESCAPING CHEMICALS
If process containing parts are to be disassembled:
• Make sure that process fluid is not under pressure or at high temperature.
• Take proper precautions concerning leakage or spillage of any toxic or otherwise
dangerous fluid. Follow any Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or Safety Data
Sheet (SDS) recommendations.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
WARNING
HAZARD OF CORROSION
The flowmeters are built using materials that are corrosion resistant to a wide
variety of fluids. However, with aggressive fluids, a potential exists for corrosive
failure. Therefore, verify the material compatibility with the NACE guidelines and/or
user knowledge of the flowmeter material compatibility with the process fluid at
operating conditions.
equipment damage.
CAUTION
RISK OF PERSONAL AND PROPERTY DAMAGE
These flowmeters must be installed by trained personnel to meet all applicable local
installation regulations, such as hazardous location requirements, electrical wiring
codes, and mechanical piping codes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Unpacking
Your flowmeter is built to be durable, but it is part of a calibrated precision system and
should be handled as such.
• Flowmeters with remote-mounted electronics have a cable connecting the
flowmeter junction box and electronics housing. Do not allow the weight of either
the flowmeter body or the electronics housing to be supported by the remote
cable.
• Avoid dropping or otherwise subjecting the flowmeter to impact, particularly at the
flange faces.
• Never put anything through the flowmeter body for lifting purposes, as damage to
the shedder bar may occur.
To unpack the flowmeter:
32 MI 019-222
Installation Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
1. Carefully remove the flowmeter body from the shipping carton.

NOTE: Wafer body meters may (depending on the pressure rating of the
flanges with which they used) have a set of centering spacers included. Do
not discard the spacers. They are needed to install the flowmeter properly.
2. Inspect the flowmeter for visible damage. If you see any damage, notify the
carrier immediately and request an inspection report. Obtain a signed copy of the
report from the carrier.
3. Remove the calibration certificate and any other documentation shipped with the
meter, and keep it for future reference.
4. Reinstall any flange covers or protective material to safeguard the meter until it is
installed.
5. Dispose of packing material in accordance with local regulations. All packing
material is nonhazardous and generally acceptable for landfills.
MI 019-222 33
Flowmeter Identification
Before installing your flowmeter, check its data plate to verify that it is correct for your
application. Specifications such as maximum ambient temperature, process
temperature, and working pressure are given on the data plate. The model code is
also stamped on the data plate as shown in Sample Flowmeter Dataplate, page 34
and can also be viewed from the Configuration menu. On flowmeters with remotely
mounted electronics, an additional data plate on the flowtube junction box (see
Sample Junction Box Data Plate, page 34) shows the Model Code and electrical
safety data. For interpretation of the Model Code, see Model Code, page 193.
Electrical certification information is located on the right end of the data plate.
To view the flowmeter’s software version on the display, navigate to the Status menu
and select 2 SW Rev.
Figure 7 - Sample Flowmeter Dataplate
Plant of Manufacture
and Date
Serial Model
Number Code Maximum Working
Pressure
MODEL 84CF040-TPRF1STATJCA ST. C

S/N 12345678 ORIGIN 2A0713
SUPPLY 24V dc nom., 22 mA max. MWP @ 100° F (38°C) 720 PSI Style Indicator
MAX. AMB. TEMP 176°F (80°C) MAX. PROC. TEMP. 500°F Maximum
Supply
REF K-FACT. 258 PULSES / ft3 - 9.11 PULSES / liter Process
Voltage K-FACTOR PULSES / Temperature
CUST. TAG CABLE ENTRIES
R
THIS PRODUCT IS PROTECTED BY THE FOLLOWING PATENTS:
US 7,212,928; US 7,853,415; US 9,322,683; (Model 84C)
AND EP 1585943. ADDITIONAL PATENTS ARE PENDING.
Calibration Maximum Ambient

K-Factor Temperature
Figure 8 - Sample Junction Box Data Plate
STYLE
MODEL 84
Remote Terminal Box
MODEL NO: ST: C
S/N:
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
• Do not open when an explosive gas or dust
FM atmosphere is present.
• Substitution of components may impair
suitability for intrinsic safety.
Failure to follow these instructions can
APPROVED result in death or serious injury.
FM16US0012X
CABLE ENTRIES 1/2 NPT

IP66 /TYPE 4X ENCLOSURE
FIELD WIRING SHALL BE RATED FOR 85˚C
CLI, II,III DIV 1, GPS A,B,C,D,E,F&G;T4 Ta=- 40˚C to 80˚C
(IS) CL I ZN 0,AEx ia IIC T4 Ta = -40˚C to + 80˚C
When installed per control drawing MI 019-177
CL I,DIV 2,GPS A,B,C, & D;

(NI)
CL II,III,DIV 2,GPS EFG T4 Ta = - 40˚C to + 80˚C
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SYSTEMS USA, INC.

38 NEPONSET AVE.
FOXBORO, MA 02035
34 MI 019-222
Piping
Hydrostatic Piping Testing
The Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter is designed to meet the pressure limits of the flange
rating specified in the model code.
84CF***-***xy
END CONNECTION AND FLANGE RATING
If your flowmeter is being installed in an application where hydrostatic testing is

performed, do not remove the sensor from the flowmeter.
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance

Flanges
The flange of the adjoining pipe must be the same nominal size and pressure rating
as the flowmeter. Flanges with a smooth bore, similar to weld neck flanges, are
preferred.
Mating Pipe
Your flowmeter was calibrated at the factory with Schedule 40 piping upstream and
downstream of the meter. If your application does not have Schedule 40 pipe, enter
the appropriate pipe size during configuration. This assures that the calibration factor
and flowmeter accuracy are maintained.
High-pressure meters (Class 900 and PN160 for 6- and 8-inch line sizes and Class
1500 for line sizes greater than 2 inches) were calibrated using Schedule 160
because the meter bore is also Schedule 160.
Upstream and Downstream Disturbances

The flowmeter should normally be mounted in a straight, unobstructed pipe with a
minimum of 30 pipe diameters upstream of the meter and five pipe diameters
downstream (see Typical Piping Configuration, page 42). For those installations
where this upstream requirement is not met, the type of disturbance must be selected
from a pick list during transmitter configuration and the distance to the disturbance in
pipe diameters entered. This assures that the flowmeter accuracy is maintained.
Piping Alignment
The bores of the pipe (flange) and flowmeter must be aligned (see Installing the
Flowmeter Body, page 43), and the flange gaskets installed such that they do not
protrude into the flow stream. If the adjoining piping cannot be properly aligned, make
the best possible alignment with the upstream flange. This minimizes the flow
disturbance in the flowmeter.
Flowmeters mounted near pump discharge or suction lines may be exposed to
oscillatory flow that may affect vortex shedding or product pipe vibration. Also,
flowmeters mounted near the discharge of a liquid positive displacement pump or
near oscillating control valves may experience severe flow fluctuations that could
MI 019-222 35
damage the sensor. To avoid these adverse situations, install the meter at least 20
feet or 40 pipe diameters, whichever is larger, from the disturbance in question.
Good piping practice requires that the internal surface of the pipe be free from mill
scale, pits, holes, reaming scores, rifling, bumps, or other irregularities for at least four
pipe diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream of the meter.
Process Temperature
Your flowmeter was calibrated at 21°C (70°F). If your process temperature is different
and the flowmeter does not have temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection
N), enter the appropriate process operating temperature during configuration.
However, if the flowmeter does have temperature compensation (Multivariable
Selection T), the temperature sensor in the flowmeter measures the actual
temperature of the process material flowing through the meter. Your flowmeter adjusts
the calibration factor to account for thermal expansion of the metals due to process
temperatures that are different from the reference calibration temperature.
Pipe Position
Piping should be planned to maintain full pipe conditions at the flowmeter. When flow
is moving with gravity, elevate the downstream pipe length above the meter
installation level to maintain a full pipeline.
Mounting Position
For optimal performance, consider the mounting locations of the sensor and integral
electronics relative to the piping. Factors that influence this decision include process
fluid type, ambient temperature, and vibration. Mount the meter in accordance with the
installation guidelines for process fluids described in Process Fluids, page 36. Also
see Recommended Mounting Arrangements, page 41.
Process Fluids
Liquid Installations
For liquid flow installations, mount the meter upstream at least five pipe diameters
from the control valve. In vertical installations, the meter should be mounted in the
upward flowing leg. This helps to maintain a full pipe and helps to ensure that there is
sufficient back pressure to prevent flashing or cavitation.
For liquid installations with occasional gas pockets or bubble formation, install piping
as shown so as to not trap the gas pockets or bubbles inside the flowmeter.
36 MI 019-222
Figure 9 - Piping Arrangements17
PIPE
NOT
FULL
BAD
BAD
GOOD GOOD GOOD
GOOD
BAD
• For clean liquids, the electronics housing can be mounted either above or below
the flowmeter body.
• The electronics housing can also be positioned to the side. This allows entrapped
air to escape.
• Take care that entrapped air does not accumulate in the sensor cavity.
• If the meter is used with liquid, mount it upstream of a control valve.
Gas Installations
For gas flow installations, several choices for flowmeter location can be considered.
For maximum rangeability, locate the flowmeter 30 or more pipe diameters
downstream from a control valve. This ensures maximum velocity at the flowmeter
and produces the most efficient signal from the sensor. This is especially
recommended when several flowmeters/control valves are coming off a common
header or pipe.
When the flow is more stable, the flowmeter can be mounted a minimum of five (5)
pipe diameters upstream of the control valve. Pressure fluctuations often are lower on
the upstream side of a control valve flow than on the downstream side. This is
recommended when a pressure sensor is used with a flowmeter to provide inputs to a
flow computer.
On gas flow installations, avoid piping conditions that create standing pockets of
liquids inside the meter. The best approach is to install the meter in a vertical line with
flow in the upwards direction.
17. Not drawn to scale.
MI 019-222 37
NOTICE
WATER HAMMER FROM TRAPPED CONDENSATE
Trapped condensate can cause a “water hammer” during startup. If you cannot
drain the condensate, open the valve slowly, allowing any trapped condensate to
travel downstream through the flowmeter at low velocity so that no damage occurs.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Figure 10 - Piping for Gas Applications18
BAD
STANDING
POCKET OF
LIQUID IN GOOD
GOOD FLOWMETER
When the process fluid is gas, the electronics housing can be above or below the
flowmeter body. The normal recommended position of the electronics housing is
above the flowmeter body.
Steam Installations
For steam control installations, mount the flowmeter 30 pipe diameters or more
downstream of the control valve. This is particularly useful when measuring saturated
steam to help ensure that a minimum amount of condensate is present at the
flowmeter.
NOTICE
WATER HAMMER FROM TRAPPED CONDENSATE
Trapped condensate can cause a “water hammer” during startup. If you cannot
drain the condensate, open the valve slowly, allowing any trapped condensate to
travel downstream through the flowmeter at low velocity so that no damage occurs.
Saturated Steam
When the process fluid is saturated steam, the electronics housing should be below
the flowmeter body, so that the sensor cavity remains filled when condensate is
present. Filling the sensor cavity with condensate results in a less noisy measurement
caused by any flashing occurring in the flowmeter due to pressure drop.
Insulate your meter as described in Insulation, page 39.
18. Not drawn to scale.
38 MI 019-222
Figure 11 - Piping for Saturated Steam Application
SATURATED STEAM
Superheated Steam
When the process fluid is superheated steam, the electronics housing can be either
above or below the flowmeter body. The flowmeter should be insulated to maintain
superheated conditions inside the flowmeter as well as insulating the electronics from
heat. Assure that the electronics temperature does not exceed 80°C (176°F) under all
flow and environmental conditions.
Insulate your meter as described in Insulation, page 39.
Insulation
The flowtube may be insulated up to the interface between the bonnet pad and the
bonnet. No insulation is allowed beyond the bonnet pad. It is particularly important to
insulate the flowtube on applications for saturated and superheated steam.
Figure 12 - Insulation
BONNET PAD
BONNET
INSULATION
MI 019-222 39
Vibration
The vortex shedder axis should be oriented to reduce or, if possible, virtually eliminate
vibration influence. Position the flowmeter so that the sensor axis is perpendicular to
the direction of the vibration.
Figure 13 - Sensor Mounting to Minimize the Effect of Vibration
SENS Not Good

OR
AXIS
VIBR
ATION
SENS
OR
VIBR AXIS Good
ATIO
N
Ambient Temperature Limitations and Considerations

The temperature limits of the electronics housing are -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)
with an optional display, or -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F) without the optional
display. When installing the flowmeter, consider ambient temperature and proximity to
other heat sources. For extended high temperature applications, this may require
positioning the electronics housing to the side or bottom, and/or insulating pipes to
ensure that the temperature limit is not exceeded. The maximum temperature rating of
80°C (176°F) is a requirement for many agency certifications.19
In installations where these agency certifications do not apply and ambient
temperature limitations are not achievable, remotely mounting the electronics in a
lower temperature area is recommended. In this configuration, only the preamplifier —
which is rated for a maximum temperature of 105°C (221°F) — is near the flowmeter.
19. The 80°C (176°C) temperature is extended to 85°C (185°F) with certain electrical certifications. Refer to Electrical Certifications, page 29.
40 MI 019-222
Recommended Mounting Arrangements

The diagrams in the following table show flanged connections; however, these
mounting arrangements apply to other connection types as well.
Table 29 - Mounting Arrangements
Flowmeter Orientation for: Liquid Gas Saturated Superheated

Steam Steam
Housing Yes20 Yes No Yes21
above pipe
Housing below Yes22 23 Yes23 Yes21 Yes21

pipe
Housing to Yes Yes No Yes21

side of pipe
Housing to Yes Yes No Yes21

side and below
pipe
Vertical pipe, Yes Yes No Yes21

upward flow
Vertical pipe, Yes24 Yes No Yes21

downward flow
20. Possibility of temporary startup error due to trapped air.

21. Requires adequate insulation.
22. Best choice when errors due to startup cannot be tolerated.
23. Recommended only for clean fluids.
24. Not preferred; must maintain full pipe with no voids in fluid.
MI 019-222 41
Meter Servicing
When you install the meter, consider meter repair. The meter should be accessible for
servicing. For installations where the flow cannot be interrupted, depressurized, or
drained, a flowmeter with an isolation valve is required.
Common practice is to install bypass piping so that the entire meter can be removed
for servicing (see figure).
Figure 14 - Typical Piping Configuration
30 PIPE DIAMETERS 5 PIPE

RECOMMENDED. DIAMETERS
RECOMMENDED
SHUTOFF VALVES
Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps

The inside of the pipe at the pressure and temperature taps must be free of burrs and
obstructions.
Figure 15 - Pressure and Temperature Tap Locations
PRESSURE TAP
(3.5 - 4.5 PDs)
TEMPERATURE TAP
DIRECTION OF FLOW 5 - 6 PDs
Pressure Taps
For density measurement (when required), locate the tap 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 pipe
diameters downstream of the flowmeter. See Pressure and Temperature Tap
Locations, page 42.
• On a gas flow installation, the pressure tap should be located on the top of the
pipe.
• On a liquid installation, the pressure tap (if required) should be located on the
side of the pipe.
42 MI 019-222
• On a steam installation, the pressure tap should be located on the top when the
pressure measuring device (typically a pressure transmitter) is above the
pipeline, and on the side when the measuring device is below the pipeline.
• With vertical piping, the pressure tap can be located anywhere around the
circumference of the pipeline.
Temperature Taps
For temperature measurement (when required), locate the tap 5 to 6 pipe diameters
downstream of the flowmeter. To reduce flow disturbance, use the smallest possible
probe. See Pressure and Temperature Tap Locations, page 42.
NOTE: With Multivariable Selection T, the flowmeter offers an integrated
temperature measurement.
Installing the Flowmeter Body

If the electronics are mounted remotely, mount the flowmeter body so that the junction
box is serviceable.
The arrow on the body of the flowmeter indicates the direction of the flow. When
installing the flowmeter, be sure the arrow on the flowmeter points in the direction of
the flow.
NOTE: Ground the flowmeter housing for proper operation and peak
performance.
Flanged Body (84CF)

Figure 16 - Flanged Flowmeter Installation
GASKET
GASKET
FLOWMETER
NOTE: The arrow on the flowmeter body must

point in the direction of the flow.
MI 019-222 43
1. Insert gaskets between the body of the flowmeter and the adjacent flanges.
Position the gaskets so that the inside diameter of each gasket is centered on the
inside diameter of the flowmeter and adjacent piping.
• User-supplied gaskets are required. Select a gasket material suitable for the
process fluid.
• Gaskets do not prevent flanges from being wetted by process fluids.
• If you are welding flanges to the process piping, protect the inside of the
flowmeter from weld splatter, which can affect flowmeter accuracy. Install a
solid sheet of gasketing at each end of the meter during welding. After
welding, remove this sheet and install the flange gaskets.
NOTICE
REDUCED PERFORMANCE
Verify that the internal diameter of the gaskets is larger than that of the flowtube
bore and pipe. Also verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the meter
entrance or exit. Protrusion into the flowstream has an adverse effect on
performance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance.
2. Visually inspect the centering and alignment of the mating flanges.

3. Install the bolts. Tighten in accordance with conventional flange bolt tightening
practice (that is, incremental and alternate tightening of bolts).
44 MI 019-222
Wafer Body (84CW)

For optimal performance, the wafer body flowmeter should be centered with respect to
the adjoining pipe. Normally, this requires the use of centering fixtures that are
supplied with the meter.
Centering fixtures are not required with ANSI Class 150 flanges.
Figure 17 - Centering a Wafer Flowmeter with Spacers
GASKET
FLOWMETER
GASKET
GASKET
HEX NUT ALIGNMENT DEVICE*
2 HEX NUT SPACERS PER SIDE*
* Not required with ANSI Class 150 Flanges; the flowmeter is centered by the bolts alone.
NOTE: The arrow on the flowmeter body must point in the direction of the flow.
1. See Centering a Wafer Flowmeter with Spacers, page 45. Insert the first stud
through the downstream flange at one of the lower holes, through the two hex-nut
spacers, and then through the upstream flange. Place the nuts on both ends of
the stud, but do not tighten.
Using the remaining hex-nut spacers, repeat this step at the lower hole next to
the first.
2. Set the flowmeter between the flanges. Then, rotate spacers to the thickness that
centers the meter.
By rotating the hex-nut spacers to the correct thickness, you can center the meter
to any type of flange.
MI 019-222 45
3. Insert gaskets between the body of the flowmeter and the adjacent flanges.
Position the gaskets so that the inside diameter of each gasket is centered on the
inside diameter of the flowmeter and adjacent piping.
• User-supplied gaskets are required. Select a gasket material suitable for the
process fluid.
• Gaskets do not prevent flanges from being wetted by process fluids.
• If you are welding flanges to the process piping, protect the inside of the
flowmeter from weld splatter, which can affect flowmeter accuracy. Install a
solid sheet of gasketing at each end of the meter during welding. After
welding, remove this sheet and install the flange gaskets.
NOTICE
REDUCED PERFORMANCE
Verify that the internal diameter of the gaskets is larger than that of the flowtube
bore and pipe. Also verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the meter
entrance or exit. Protrusion into the flowstream has an adverse effect on
performance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance.
4. Visually inspect the centering and alignment of the mating flanges.

If the adjoining flanges are misaligned, align the wafer body flowmeter with the
upstream flange.
5. Install the rest of the studs and nuts. Tighten in accordance with conventional
flange bolt tightening practice (that is, incremental and alternate tightening of
bolts).
NPT Body (84CN)

1. Apply process-compatible thread sealant to the flowtube’s threaded end
connection.
2. Secure the threaded pipe adapter to the flowtube’s threaded end connection.
3. Secure the pipeline end of the adapter to the pipeline.
46 MI 019-222
Sanitary Body (84CS)

Piping Considerations for Sanitary Flowmeters
NOTE:
• Prior to installation, spring back the piping on either end of the flowmeter to
allow as much space as is required to install the flowmeter without damaging
the flowmeter body ends.
• Mating end connection parts (clamps, connections, and gaskets) are required
and are supplied by the user. Select a gasket or seal material which is
suitable for the process liquid.
• Firmly secure the cable that connects the flowmeter body to the electronics
housing. The support should be approximately 30 cm (12 in) from the
flowmeter body as shown in the figure. A loose cable may cause wear at the
cable connection and result in signal noise. The temperature limit of the cable
is 105°C (220°F). Do not support the cable on a surface exceeding this
temperature.
Figure 18 - Flowmeter Body Cable Support
APPROXIMATELY
30 cm (12 in)
Effects of Piping on Sanitary Flowmeter Performance

• The vortex shedder axis can be oriented to reduce, or in some cases eliminate,
vibration influence. Positioning the flowmeter body so that vibrations are parallel
to the sensor diaphragms minimizes the effects of vibrations.
MI 019-222 47
• To help ensure that your flowmeter performs to its fullest capabilities, it should be
mounted in a straight, unobstructed pipe. The recommended minimum amount of
straight pipe upstream is shown in the table. There should be a minimum of eight
diameters of straight pipe downstream. See the figure.
Table 30 - Typical Piping Configurations
Recommended Upstream Pipe

Upstream Configuration Diameters
90º Elbow 30
Two elbows in different planes with the closet elbow in the 45
same plane as the shedder element.25
Two elbows in different planes with the closest elbow 35

perpendicular to the plane of the shedder.25
15:1 reduction in piping diameter. 35
Butterfly valve (wide open) 30
Figure 19 - Bypass Piping
8 PIPE
DIAMETERS
SEE TABLE
SHUTOFF VALVES
• It is recommended that control valves, when required, be mounted downstream

from the flowmeter body to help ensure that back pressure is sufficient to
maintain a full pipe, and to help prevent pressure loss sufficient to cause flashing
or cavitation. Verify that the gaskets do not protrude into the pipe line.
• The piping which attaches to the flowmeter body end connections must be rigidly
supported. This minimizes the effects of piping vibration on flowmeter
performance.
• The flowmeter should not be located near pump discharge line or suction lines.
Pumps often produce oscillatory flow which may affect vortex shedding or
produce pipe vibration.
• Flowmeters mounted near the discharge of liquid positive displacement pumps
may experience severe flow fluctuations and cause damage to the sensor.
• Good piping practice is to assume that for four pipe diameters upstream and two
pipe diameters downstream, the internal surface of the pipe shall be free from mill
scale, pits, holes, reaming scores, rifling, bumps, or other irregularities.
25. The shedder is located in the bore of the flowmeter.
48 MI 019-222
Bypass Piping
It is sometimes desirable to provide bypass piping if the flow cannot be interrupted for
servicing the flowmeter. see Bypass Piping, page 48.
WARNING
RISK OF HIGH PRESSURE
If you use a bypass, you must also incorporate some means to relieve the pressure
from the main line before you loosen the vortex flange bolts or clamps.
equipment damage.
Installing the Flowmeter with Sanitary End Connections

The 84C with sanitary body has the following end connection choices:
• 3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent) (Code C0)
• 3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent) (Code T0)
The end connections on your flowmeter body were specified as part of your order. All
end connections are welded to the flowmeter body. You supply the mating end
connections, gaskets, and clamps.
WARNING
RISK OF HIGH PRESSURE
The maximum pressure limit of the flowmeter is 1.9 MPa (275 psig) or the limit of
the end connection used, whichever is less.
equipment damage.
3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent) (Code C0)

The 3-A I-Line fitting mates with Cherry Burrell 15 WI or equivalent.
Figure 20 - 3-A I-Line Fitting
1. Insert the seals into the flowmeter body ends.
MI 019-222 49
2. Insert the mating pipe ends and tighten the clamps securely.
3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent) (Code T0)

The 3-A Tri-Clamp Quick-Disconnect Ferrule mates with a Tri-Clover 14 WMP or
equivalent.
Figure 21 - 3-A Fitting Tri-Clamp
1. Insert the seal into the flowmeter body ends.

2. Make full face contact between the pipe and flowmeter body ends prior to
installing and tightening the clamps.
Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing

The remote electronics housing allows for separation of the flowmeter body from the
electronics. All flowmeters can be remotely mounted. The sanitary flowmeter is only
available with a remote mounted electronics housing with a 4.5 m (15 ft) cable.
A flowmeter with remote electronics consists of:
• An electronics housing mounted to a pipe or wall mounting bracket with up to
15 m (50 ft) of interconnecting cable attached.
• A flowmeter body with a junction box.
1/2 NPT or M20 conduit connections are provided on both the housing and the
junction box.
The remote electronics housing can be mounted to a vertical or horizontal DN 50 or
2 in pipe using the mounting bracket and U-bolt supplied. To mount the housing to a
horizontal pipe, turn the U-bolt 90 degrees from the position shown in the diagram.
50 MI 019-222
Figure 22 - Mounting the Remote Electronics Housing
HOUSING
TERMINALS
FIELD
MOUNTING
BRACKET
JAM NUT CABLE TO
JUNCTION
BOX
U-BOLT
Surface Mounting
NOTE: Ground the flowmeter housing for proper operation and peak
performance.
The housing can be surface mounted by securing the mounting bracket to a wall using
the bracket mounting holes. It may be easier to secure the mounting bracket to the
wall without the housing attached. To do this, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the jam nut under the bracket.
2. Raise the housing until you can slide the cable through the cutout in the bracket.
3. Lay the housing aside and secure the mounting bracket to the wall.
4. Place the housing in the bracket.
5. Tighten the jam nut under the bracket.
Cover Locks
Electronic housing cover locks are provided as standard with certain agency
certifications.
To lock the covers:
1. Unscrew the locking pin until approximately 6 mm (0.25 in) shows, lining up the
hole in the pin with the hole in the housing.
2. Insert the seal wire through the two holes, slide the seal onto the wire ends, and
crimp the seal.
MI 019-222 51
Figure 23 - Cover Locks
COVER LOCK (2)

(IF PRESENT)
Positioning the Display

You can rotate the optional display within the housing to any of four positions at 90°
increments. To do this, loosen the two captive screws, turn the display to the desired
position, and retighten the screws.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL CABLE DAMAGE
• Do not turn the display more than 180° in either direction. Doing so can damage
its connecting cable.
• Carefully fold the ribbon cable in the space between the display and the
electronics module so that it is not pinched. The display molding should rest
firmly against the module molding before you tighten the screws.
Setting the Write Protect Jumper

Your flowmeter has write protection capability which meets the requirements of
ISA-S84.01-1986 for use in safety shutdown systems. This means that the local
display and remote electronics can be prevented from writing to the electronics.
NOTE: Even when the flowmeter is write-enabled, you can limit writing to certain
functions by setting passwords. See Using Passwords, page 105.
To activate write protection:
1. Remove the display.
2. Remove the jumper.
3. Place the jumper in the “protect” position. Refer to the diagram.
NOTE: Removing the jumper activates write protection. The “protect” position
is simply a place to store the jumper when it is not in use.
4. To cancel write protection and enable writing, return the jumper to the “write”
position.
52 MI 019-222
Figure 24 - Write Protect Jumper
JUMPER IN JUMPER IN
PROTECT WRITE
POSITION POSITION
WRITE PROTECTION PINS
Positioning the Housing

You can rotate the flowmeter housing up to one full turn in the counterclockwise
direction (when viewed from above) for optimal access to adjustments, display, and
conduit connections. The housing has a retention clip that prevents rotating the
housing beyond a safe depth of housing/sensor thread engagement.
Figure 25 - Housing Retention Clip Location
RETENTION CLIP
HOUSING
RETENTION CLIP
CUP
CLIP
Electrical Installation
Field Termination Wiring
The installation and wiring of your flowmeter must conform to local code requirements.
Also, for FM and CSA installations, refer to MI 019-177; for ATEX and IECEx
installations, refer to MI 019-179.
NOTICE
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT OR SURGE
Use transient/surge protection in installations prone to unusually high levels of
electrical transients and surges.
MI 019-222 53
Conduit/Cable Gland Connections

The electronics housing has two conduit/cable gland connections to allow access
from either side of the housing. These connections are 1/2 NPT or M20 threads per
your order. Use the correct threaded devices when making these connections. You
can verify the type of thread with the ninth character after the dash in the model code
on the data plate. The letters T or R indicate a 1/2 NPT thread; V or W, an M20 thread.
Refer to “Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing” in Model Code,
page 193.
The housing comes with an agency-approved threaded metal plug in one of the
conduit holes and a plastic plug in the other. After you connect the conduit or cable
gland, plug the unused hole with the metal plug.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
To help prevent explosions and to maintain flameproof, explosionproof, and dust-
ignitionproof protection, observe applicable wiring practices. Plug the unused
conduit openings with approved conduit plugs. Both plug and conduit must engage
a minimum of five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; eight full threads for M20
connections.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
Accessing Flowmeter Field Terminals

For access to the field terminals, remove the cover from the field terminals
compartment.
Figure 26 - Accessing Field Terminals

1/2 NPT OR M20 CONDUIT CONNECTION FOR
CUSTOMER WIRING. ONE ON OPPOSITE SIDE ALSO.
PLUG UNUSED OPENING WITH THE METAL PLUG
PROVIDED OR EQUIVALENT.
REMOVE COVER TO ACCESS

WIRING TERMINALS
EXTERNAL GROUND
54 MI 019-222
Figure 27 - Identification of Field Terminals
GROUND SCREW
(EXTERNAL TO THE
TERMINAL BLOCK)
+ +
P
U
POWER
L PULSE
OUTPUT
TERMINALS S TERMINALS
E
PE
PE GROUND
NOTE: The terminal markings vary on different receivers (RTUs, modems).

• If the terminals on the receiver are marked only + and –, use the
corresponding designations on the transmitter.
• If the terminals on the receiver are marked only A and B, use the
corresponding designations on the transmitter.
• If the terminals on the receiver are marked both A/B and +/–, but A is – and B
is + (different than the transmitter), use the +/– designations on the
transmitter and disregard the A and B markings.
Remotely Mounted Electronics

To use the flowmeter as shipped with the cable attached at both ends, mount the
electronics housing and flowmeter body within the limits of the cable length.
If the cable must be disconnected (to shorten the cable, run the cable through conduit,
or for some other reason), you must disconnect the cable at the flowmeter (junction
box) end. You cannot disconnect the cable at the electronics housing end because it
has been epoxied into the metal connector. It is labeled: “Factory Sealed / Electronics
End / Do Not Remove.”
Preparing the Remote Signal Cable

If the cable must be shortened or re-terminated, prepare the flowmeter (junction box)
end of the cable.
MI 019-222 55
1. Insert the cable into the knurled nut and rubber grommet. Then remove the outer
insulation to the dimension shown. Do not damage the copper braid.
8.5±1/8"
2. Cut the copper braid one inch from the end of the outer insulation.
Copper braid Metallized mylar film
Outer clear wrapping
1"
3. Insert the cable into the fitting until the cable is bottomed out inside the fitting.
Rotate the fitting one or two turns to pack the braid into place. Remove the cable
and examine the packed braid. If there are still strands of braid that have not
packed, push them back by hand and reinsert the cable into the fitting. Remove
the cable and examine the braid. It should be compressed to a length of
approximately 3/8 to 1/2 inch.
Compressed copper braid Fitting
Rubber grommet
4. Remove the outer clear wrapping and the metallized mylar film to the end of the
packed braid. This exposes the inner drain wire. The inner clear wrapping and
filler material are still in place.
3/8" to 1/2" Outer clear
wrapping
Metallized mylar film
5. Make sure that the drain wire is not in contact with the outer braid, then use an
ohm meter to verify that there is no electrical connection between the drain wire
and the braid over the entire length of the cable. This step also verifies that the
electronics end of the cable has been properly dressed, and that there is no
damage or other issue with the cable.
Drain wire
Inner clear wrapping
6. Fold the drain wire back onto the packed wire braid and wrap it around one full
turn. Then cut off the remainder of the drain wire.
Drain wire folded back, wrapped
once around, and trimmed
56 MI 019-222
7. Cut back the inner clear wrapping and the filler to 1/2 to 5/8 inch from the end of
the outer insulation.
Twisted pair
1/2" to 5/8"
8. Cut a half-inch long piece of shrink wrap. Position it so that half the wrap covers
the inner clear wrapping/filler, and half covers the exposed twisted wires. Apply
heat to the shrink wrap.
NOTE: You can use a half-inch piece of electrical tape in place of the shrink
wrap.
1/2"
Shrink wrap or
electrical tape
9. Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of the wires.

Knurled nut
Number of wires may vary
1/4"
Connecting the Remote Signal Cable

After the cable end is prepared, connect the cable to the junction box..
1. Insert the cable into the fitting, making sure that the cable has bottomed out in the
fitting.
2. Slide the rubber grommet into the fitting.
3. Screw the knurled nut into place, clamping the rubber grommet against the
assembly. Hand tighten with moderate force to assure a water tight connection.
4. Dress the wires in the junction box as shown in the diagram.
Figure 28 - Connection of Remote Signal Cable (Junction Box End)
Y
O
R B
B Y
Knurled nut and

rubber grommet
R
V R
R/W N
G N
W
MI 019-222 57
Installation with Conduit

The remote signal cable is shipped with the cable attached at both ends. To run the
cable through conduit, the Mounting/Conduit Openings For Electronic Housing -T
option must have been purchased. This option facilitates a standard 1/2 NPT conduit
connection at both the housing end and the flowmeter end.
1. Disconnect the cable at the flowmeter (junction box) end.
2. Slide the remote conduit adapter (part number K0149LE), longer end first, up the
cable and attach it at the housing end.
3. Slide the conduit and fittings over the cable.
4. Slide a second remote conduit adapter, shorter end first, onto the cable and
attach it at the junction box end.
Explosionproof or Flameproof Certifications

The remote cable provides an explosionproof/flameproof connection at the electronics
end. Explosionproof connections beyond this point are not required. See the diagram
for installation guidelines for explosionproof or flameproof certifications.
Figure 29 - Installation of Remote Model 84C with Explosionproof or Flameproof Certification

WITH HART, THERE MUST BE AT LEAST 250 OHMS
OF TOTAL RESISTANCE IN THE POSITIVE LEG
LOOP BETWEEN THE TRANSMITTER AND THE PC-BASED
CONFIGURATOR OR HART COMMUNICATOR
GND
+ + + POWER
SUPPLY
– – –
REMOTE FLOWTUBE
PE PE GROUND
NEGATIVE TERMINAL
MUST BE GROUNDED
TO EARTH
THE PE GROUND WIRE MUST HAVE LESS THAN 1 Ω

OF RESISTANCE FROM THE FARTHEST BARRIER TO
THE MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE
58 MI 019-222
Loop Wiring
The HART flowmeter (Electronics Version -T) cannot output a 4 to 20 mA signal when
loop current mode is disabled. The Low Power flowmeter (Electronics Version -L)
does not output a 4 to 20 mA signal at all. In both cases, the mA output is set to a fixed
value.
For HART communication, a 250 Ω load resistor must be present in the power supply
loop, and a terminal voltage of at least 15.75 V dc (HART version) or 10 V dc (Low
Power version) must be maintained. For Low Power, there must be at least 12.5 V dc
loop voltage.
When wiring a flowmeter with a 4 to 20 mA output signal, the supply voltage and loop
load must be within specified limits. The supply output load versus voltage relationship
is shown in the following graph. You can use any combination of supply voltage and
loop load resistance in the shaded area. To determine the loop load resistance
(flowmeter output load), add the series resistance of each component in the loop,
excluding the flowmeter. The power supply must be capable of supplying 22 mA of
loop current.
Figure 30 - Supply Voltage and Loop Load

1400
1200
OUTPUT LOAD, W
1000
MINIMUM LOAD
800 WITH
CONFIGURATOR 30 V MAXIMUM FOR
OR INTRINSICALLY
600 COMMUNICATOR SAFE UNITS.
SEE NOTE 2.
400
250
200
227.5 W @ 17.7 V SEE NOTE 1 BELOW
0
15 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
SUPPLY VOLTAGE, V dc
NOTE:
1. The flowmeter can function with an output load less than 250 Ω if a HART
Communicator or PC-based configurator is not connected to it.
Connecting a HART Communicator or PC-based configurator while operating
with an output load less than 250 Ω may result in output and/or
communication disturbances.
2. With intrinsically safe certifications with a 24 V dc power supply, an active
barrier is required.
Examples
• For a loop load resistance of 300 Ω, the supply voltage can be any value from
19.1 to 30 V dc(up to 42 V dc if not certified intrinsicially safe).
• For a supply voltage of 24 V dc, the loop load resistance can be:
◦ 250 to 520 Ω with a HART Communicator or PC-based configurator
connected
◦ 0 to 520 Ω without a HART Communicator or PC-based configurator
connected
Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply

1. Remove the cover from the field terminals compartment.
MI 019-222 59
2. Run signal wires through one of the flowmeter’s conduit connections. (Do not run
flowmeter wires in the same conduit as the mains/ac power wires.)
• Twisted pair helps protect the 4 to 20 mA output and/or remote
communications from electrical noise.
• Typical signal wires are 0.50 mm2 (20 AWG).
• The maximum recommended length for signal wires is 1,800 m (6,000 ft).
3. If you use shielded cable, ground the shield at the negative terminal of the power
supply only. Do not ground the shield at the flowmeter.
4. Plug unused conduit openings.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
To help prevent explosions and to maintain flameproof, explosionproof, and
dust-ignitionproof protection, observe applicable wiring practices. Plug the
unused conduit openings with approved conduit plugs. Both plug and conduit
must engage a minimum of five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; eight full
threads for M20 connections.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
5. The flowmeter is equipped with both an internal and an external ground

connection. Connect a ground wire to either terminal in accordance with local
practice.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL REDUCED PERFORMANCE OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
If the signal circuit must be grounded, it is preferable to ground it at the
negative terminal of the dc power supply. To avoid errors resulting from ground
loops or the possibility of short-circuiting groups of instruments in a loop, there
should be only one ground in a loop.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced performance or
equipment damage.
6. Connect the power supply and receiver loop wires to the “+” and “–” terminals.
7. Connect receivers (such as controllers, recorders, or indicators) in series with the
power supply and flowmeter.
8. Install the cover onto the flowmeter. Turn the cover to seat the o-ring into the
housing. Continue to hand-tighten until the cover contacts the housing metal-to-
metal. If cover locks are present, refer to Cover Locks, page 51.
9. To wire additional flowmeters to the same power supply, repeat these steps for
each flowmeter.
You can connect a HART Communicator or PC-based configurator in the loop

between the flowmeter and the power supply as shown in the diagram.
• There must be at least 250 Ω total resistance between the PC-based configurator
or HART Communicator and the power supply. Refer to Supply Voltage and Loop
Load, page 59.
• For HART communication with a Low Power flowmeter, a 250 Ω load resistor
must be present in the supply loop, and a minimum loop voltage of 12.5 V dc
must be maintained.
60 MI 019-222
Figure 31 - Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply

1/2 NPT or M20 CONDUIT
CONNECTION (2 PLACES)
INTERNAL
GROUND
POWER TERMINAL
SUPPLY
RECEIVER
+ – – + 250 OHM
RESISTOR + +
P
U
L
S
E
PE
OPTIONAL GROUND
EXTERNAL
OPTIONAL SHIELDED WIRE GROUND PE GROUND
TERMINAL REQUIRED FOR
EXPLOSIONPROOF
(FLAMEPROOF)
HART COMMUNICATOR or APPLICATIONS
PC-BASED CONFIGURATOR
Wiring a Flowmeter with a Pulse Output

See Wiring the Flowmeter to a Power Supply, page 59 for an overview of wiring,
grounding, voltage, and resistance requirements.
If you are replacing an E83FA, E83WA, or Model 83 flowmeter that was previously
wired with a three-wire hookup, use the three-wire method of wiring a flowmeter with
pulse output.
For new installations, the four-wire method is recommended because the three-wire
method can interfere with HART communications at certain pulse output frequencies.
Four-Wire Method
An additional, separate loop is required when using the pulse output on a flowmeter
with the 4 to 20 mA or digital signal. Each loop requires its own power supply.
The maximum pulse output current is 20 mA. Use a load resistor that is sized
accordingly. An 1000 ohm load resistor is shown as an example in the diagram.
Figure 32 - Four-Wire Method of Wiring a Flowmeter with Pulse Output
TO LOOP POWER (+) INTERNAL GROUND

TERMINAL
TO LOOP POWER (–) POWER
SUPPLY
+ + COUNTER
P
U + – + –
L
S
E
PE
OPTIONAL
GROUND
EXTERNAL 1000 OHM LOAD OPTIONAL
GROUND RESISTOR FOR PULSE SHIELDED WIRE
TERMINAL OUTPUT CURRENT
PE GROUND
REQUIRED FOR
EXPLOSIONPROOF
(FLAMEPROOF)
APPLICATIONS
MI 019-222 61
Three-Wire Method
The maximum pulse output current is 20 mA. Use a load resistor that is sized
accordingly.
Place a jumper between the two negative terminals as shown in the diagram.
Figure 33 - Three-Wire Method

1/2 NPT or M20 CONDUIT
CONNECTION (2 PLACES)
INTERNAL
GROUND
TERMINAL
+ COUNTER POWER
+ SUPPLY
P
U + – + –
L
S
E
OPTIONAL
PE
GROUND
EXTERNAL RESISTOR FOR PULSE

GROUND OUTPUT CURRENT
TERMINAL
JUMPER RESISTOR FOR HART
COMMUNICATION
PE GROUND
REQUIRED FOR
EXPLOSIONPROOF HART COMMUNICATOR
(FLAMEPROOF) OR PC-BASED CONFIGURATOR
APPLICATIONS
Multidrop Communication
Multidrop technology refers to the connection of several devices to a single
communications transmission line. Communication between the host computer and
the devices takes place digitally with the analog output of the flowmeter deactivated.
The application of a multidrop installation requires consideration of the update rate
necessary from each device, the combination of devices, and the length of the
transmission line. Communication with the 84C flowmeters can be accomplished with
any HART compatible modem and a host implementing the HART protocol. Each
flowmeter is identified by a unique address (0 through 63) and responds to the
commands defined in the HART protocol.
NOTE: Multidrop installations of these flowmeters are not recommended where
Intrinsic Safety is a requirement.
The next figure shows a typical multidrop network. Do not use this figure as an
installation diagram. Contact the FieldComm Group (http://www.fieldcommgroup.org)
for specific requirements for multidrop applications.
62 MI 019-222
Figure 34 - Multidrop Network
HOST MODEM
LOAD
POWER
SUPPLY
84C 84C
The HART Communicator can operate, configure, and calibrate Model 84C Vortex
Flowmeters with HART communication protocol the same way it can in a standard
point-to-point installation.
Flowmeters are shipped from the factory with a poll address of 0 and with the loop
current mode set to “enabled” (active), allowing the flowmeters to operate in a
standard point-to-point manner with a 4 to 20 mA output signal.
Changing the poll address does not automatically deactivate the 4 to 20 mA analog
output. Only one device per multidrop network can be configured with loop current
enabled.
To activate multidrop communication, assign each flowmeter a unique address (0
through 63) on each multidrop network. Then, to fix the mA output value, set the loop
current mode to “disabled.”
MI 019-222 63
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Operating the Flowmeter
Operating the Flowmeter

You can operate the flowmeter with the optional local display, a HART Communicator,
or a PC-based configurator and the DTM.
The specifics of each communication method are provided as follows:
• Using the flowmeter with the Optional Local Display (see Using the Local Display,
page 104)
• Using the flowmeter with the HART Communicator (see the manual for the HART
Communicator and Using the HART Communicator, page 159)
• Using the flowmeter with a PC-based configurator (see the manual for the PC-
based configurator and MI 020-520, PC50 Intelligent Field Device Tool with DTM
Library - Operation Using HART Communications Protocol)
NOTE: The names or organization of the options available vary between the
different communication methods, but the functions are the same.
Personalities
You can select a personality for the flowmeter. The purpose of a personality is to
preconfigure and simplify (or limit) some of the flowmeter settings and measurements
available for a specific user application or set of applications. Measurement
generation, configuration setting options, and behaviors available may be different
depending on the personality selected.
If you specify the personality to be used when you purchase your flowmeter, it will be
preconfigured at the factory with that selected personality.
NOTE: It is possible to change the personality that was preconfigured at the
factory. See Setting Advanced Options, page 95.
The following personalities are available:
• The General personality provides all the possible functions and settings. This is
the most unrestricted personality. It can be used for all user defined fluids and
Model Code options.
• The Steam personality is targeted to applications for steam flow. The fluid
selection in this personality is limited to saturated steam or superheated steam.
When using the Steam personality, the alert behavior of the flowmeter is modified
to allow configuration of an Upper Range Value (URV) for the Mass Flow
measurement based on the nominal operating region of the Steam fluid (even if
the current operating temperature is at room temperature, rather than in the
Steam region). In this case, you can set the URV and a “NoSteam?” message will
be alternately flashed on the third line of the local display.
Additionally, the Base Volume measurement is not displayed or active when using
the Steam personality, as it is not relevant to Steam flow. The Steam personality
can be used with all Model Code options.
64 MI 019-222
Operating the Flowmeter Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
• The Oil & Gas personality is targeted to simplify configuration for the
measurement of flow in oil and gas applications. When using the Oil & Gas
personality, a limited set of EGUs is available and easy-to-use menus are
provided. The Oil & Gas personality supports a single totalizer labeled “Total”
which is always mapped to Volumetric flow. The Total EGU follows the Volume
Rate EGU (for example, bbl/d results in a total of barrels).
There is no user configuration for the single totalizer, Total. You can start, stop, or
clear Total from the local display or a HART command.
Additionally, if pulse output is available, it is mapped to Volumetric flow and
preconfigured for Frequency mode using the user liquid upper range limit of the
meter for limiting the maximum pulse output frequency. Like the totalizer, the
pulse output is always On when the meter is online; and the only user
configuration is the Pulse Per Unit Factor, which you can set from the local
display or a HART command.
The reduced EGU list for the Oil & Gas personality is:
gal/m gallons per minute
bbl/h barrels per hour
bbl/d barrels per day
m3/s meters cubed per second
m3/d meter cubed per day
Although there are other options available in the menus, you typically need to
configure only the Flowmeter EGU and the Pulse per Unit Factor when using the
Oil & Gas personality.
The Oil & Gas personality can be used with all Model Code options.
If you change the personality of the flowmeter, the parameters are automatically set to
the default values for the new personality. The table below lists the default parameter
values for each personality.
Table 31 - Default Parameter Values for Personalities
Parameter Name General Personality Steam Personality Oil & Gas Personality
Adaptive Filter enable Enabled (normal setting) FixedGas setting
LFCI Level 4 5
Calculation Method=User On; Calculation Method=User On;
Volume Rate Configuration no change
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad
Volume Rate Unit no change bbl/d (barrels/day)
Measurement Damping 2 seconds 0 seconds
Calculation Method=User On;

Base Volume Configuration n/a no change
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
Calculation Method is based on Model Code: UserOn if RTD is present;

Temperature Configuration
Alert Strategy=OnAlert Bad

Density Configuration
Fluid Identifier User Liquid Saturated Steam User Liquid
Fluid Material Name Default Water Default Steam Default Water

Mass Flow Configuration
no change
Velocity Configuration Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
no change
Viscosity Configuration
MI 019-222 65
Table 31 - Default Parameter Values for Personalities (Continued)
Parameter Name General Personality Steam Personality Oil & Gas Personality
Calculation Method=User On; Calculation Method=User On;

Pulse Output Configuration Alert Strategy=OnAlert Use Alert Strategy=OnAlert Continue
Default
Pulse Output Mode None Freq
Pulse Output Mapped

Volume Rate Volume Rate
Source no change
Pulse Output Upper Range
1000Hz 350Hz
Value
Pulse Output Default
Frequency 0Hz 0Hz
Pulse Output Factor 1 3.79E-05
Pulse Output Pulse Mode

Mapped Source Volume Flow Rate Volume Flow Rate
Pulse Output Pulse Mode gallons

Factor EGU
no change
0 n/a
Default Value
1
Units/Pulse Factor
PV Map Volume Flow Rate Volume Flow Rate
SV Map Total1
Total1
TV Map Total2
no change
QV Map Vortex Frequency Vortex Frequency
mA Offline Value 0
no change
Multidrop Indicator 1
Total 1 Configuration Total Off, cleared
Total 2 Configuration Total Off, cleared Total Off, cleared

unavailable
Total 3 Configuration
Total 1 Units kg
Total 2 Units no change bbl (barrels)

m3
Total 3 Units
Total 1 Mapped Source Mass Flow Rate
Total 2 Mapped Source no change Volume Flow Rate

Volume Flow Rate
Total 3 Mapped Source
Personality General Steam Oil&Gas
Noise Reduction Mode Method1 Method1 Method1

Enthalpy Configuration
Heat Content Configuration
Flowmeter Functions and Actions

You can perform the following functions and actions on the flowmeter.
66 MI 019-222
• Measurement - The normal operating mode of the flowmeter where you can
display real-time flowmeter measurements. The display indicates whether
diagnostic conditions exist, and displays rollover counter values for totalizers 1, 2,
and 3. The selected default measurement is displayed when the transmitter is
turned on. (See Measurement, page 105.)
• Status - Provides the status of various parameters, write protection (local display
only), and any diagnostic messages.
• Setup - Used to set up (configure) the flowmeter for your application. This
includes defining fluid, flow, tuning, total output, piping, tags, flowtube, and
password parameters. Depending on the Personality selected, the setup
parameters may be limited.
• Calibration/Test - Used to perform several calibration and test functions on the
flowmeter.
• Pulse Actions (available only if Pulse Output is configured for Pulse Mode) -
Used to control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the total
flow value. Also allows you to select whether or not the flowmeter is actively
accumulating values and transmitting pulse signals.
• Totalizer Actions - The flowmeter has three separate totalizers that accumulate
flow measurement to keep track of amounts of flow. (For the Oil & Gas
personality, there is only a single totalizer.) Each totalizer can be mapped
independently to keep track of different measurements. The Totalizer functions
are used to control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the
total flow value.
Status
Status functions include:
• Measurement Status - Allows you to review the units, value, and status of the
system parameters and thus assess the performance of the loop. You cannot edit
parameters from this function.
• Write Protection (local display only) - Allows you to view whether write protection
is enabled or disabled.
• Diagnostic Messages and Alerts - Shows diagnostic messages and alerts
generated by the flowmeter.
• Reason Codes - Shows messages in hexadecimal format used by Global
Customer Support to diagnose issues.
• Software Revisions - Shows the software revision currently running in the
flowmeter.
• Time in Service Meter - Shows the values of the Time in Service meter for the
flowmeter. Two values are displayed:
◦ Primary - The number of days the flowmeter has been powered up over its
lifetime.
◦ User - The number of days the flowmeter has been powered up since the last
reset.
See the Status Menu Diagram, page 113 for the menu on the local display for the
General and Steam personalities, see the Status Menu Diagram, page 146 for the
menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality, and see HART Communicator
Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART Communicator.
The status values associated with the diagnostic messages are shown in Messages,
page 101.
MI 019-222 67
Setup
Setup enables you to configure your fluid, tuning, totalizer, measurement, output,
pipe, tag, and flowtube parameters. It also enables you to reset the flowmeter back to
factory defaults. When using the local display, Setup functions can be password
protected. You can establish and change your passwords from the Setup menu. See
Using Passwords, page 105.
For easy configuration of your Model 84C Vortex Flowmeter, it is recommended that
you configure the flowmeter in the sequence described in Recommended Setup
Procedure, page 69.
When you are configuring the flowmeter using the local display, you are asked to
confirm that your control loop is in manual mode. Verify that your control system is in
manual mode before proceeding beyond this prompt. Once you confirm the prompt,
the flowmeter enters offline mode with no output.
NOTE: When in offline mode, all outputs stop and all configured totalizers stop
accumulating. A totalizer alert is generated.
When configuring the flowmeter using the HART Communicator, the flowmeter does
not switch to offline mode for configuration. All configuration changes are made when
the flowmeter is operational and the new parameter values become active as soon as
they are set.
The following types of parameters can be configured:
• Fluid
• Tuning
• Measurement
• Totalizer
• Output
• Piping
• Flowtube identification
• Advanced options, including selecting a personality
• Database reset
• Password (local display only). See Using Passwords, page 105.
The configuration parameters available depend on the personality that is enabled.
For convenience, there is a set of measurement parameters that can be configured
from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration menu:
• Flow Temperature
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
Measurement Properties
You configure measurement properties for many of the parameters in the Fluid menu
and the Measurement Configuration menu. The following table defines each of these
measurement properties. See the parameter descriptions for the default values for
each measurement property.
68 MI 019-222
Table 32 - Measurement Properties
Local Display HART Communicator Description
EGU Units Engineering units (EGUs): Select an appropriate engineering unit for each fluid
measurement type. Refer to Units, page 16.
EGUTYP N/A EGU Type: (For Base Volumetric Flow only) Choose to use the standard or
normalized volume for the Base Volume Rate (BVolrate) measurement
parameter.
LRV LRV Lower Range Value: Enter the lower range value for the measurement type.
Some fluid parameters (flow, for example) do not have an LRV option because it
should always be 0.
URV URV Upper Range Value: Enter the upper range value for the measurement type.
Default Default Default: Enter the default value to which the flowmeter will set the measurement
value if an error occurs.
AlertSt Alert Strategy Alert Strategy: This property allows you to configure how the flowmeter will react
to an alert with regard to the measurement you are configuring.
• On Alert Continue (NoAlert): On an alert, the flowmeter continues to run, but
the measurement is set to a clipped lower or upper limit and a status alert is
generated.
• On Alert (AlertBad): On an alert, the output value is set to the upper or lower
hard limit, and a status alert is generated. For example, the mA output is set
to 3.6 mA or 22 mA, depending on whether you configured the mA to fail low
(DownScale) or high (UpScale).
• On Alert Use the Default (AlertDef): On an alert, the flowmeter continues to
run, but the measurement is set to a user-defined default.
NOTE:
• mA output only supports On Alert (AlertBad).
• Pulse output only supports On Alert Use the Default (AlertDef).
CMethod Mode Calculation Method: This property describes how the particular measurement is
calculated:
• User Def: The measurement always uses a default.
• User On: When the Calculation method is set to User On, the measurement
is calculated by the flowmeter. For example, the flowmeter can correct
density and viscosity of liquids. See Fluid Parameters, page 74.
NOTE: Pressure does not support the UserOn calculation method.
• By Remote: The measurement is transmitted by remote communications.
4 Damp Damp Damping: This property allows you to set damping for fluid configuration
parameters. Possible settings are:
• None, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
Recommended Setup Procedure

Configure your flowmeter in the following sequence:
1. Change the model code if necessary.
Typically, the model code of the flowmeter should not be reset. You reset the
model code only if you are replacing a module with the assistance of Global
Customer Support. However, in the unlikely event that you need to perform this
action, it must be the first step of the configuration process.
2. Determine which personality you want to use and verify that the flowmeter was
preconfigured with the correct personality at the factory. For details on how to
change the personality, see Setting Advanced Options, page 95.
MI 019-222 69
3. Configure the required settings in the order listed below:

a. Fluid type
b. Measurement properties
c. Flowmeter’s output
d. Noting which measurements are mapped to which outputs, check and set the
appropriate measurement ranges.
4. Configure the optional settings in the order listed below:
a. Configure the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI).
b. Map the totalizers.
c. Configure the piping parameters.
d. Configure the reference K-factor.
e. Configure passwords, if applicable.
f. Turn totalizers on.
For a detailed example of how to achieve a 4 to 20 analog output for Mass Flow, pulse
output for Mass Flow, and how to display Total Mass using the local display, see
Configuration Example, page 109.
Setting Fluid Parameters

You can configure the following fluid parameters: the fluid type, fluid name (optional),
flowing temperature, base temperature, density, base density, pressure, base
pressure, viscosity, and thermal coefficients for density and velocity.
NOTE: The flowing temperature, density, pressure and viscosity parameters can
be set from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration menu.
Changing the fluid type causes the fluid parameters to be set to default values for that
type:
• Liquid - water at 15°C (59°F ambient)
• Gas - air at 101.00 kPaa (14.65 psia)
• Vapor/Saturated Steam - at 957.34 kPaa (138.85 psia)
NOTE: Changing the fluid type may affect the mapped output you have selected.
Fluid Types
The following fluid types are available for each personality:
• General Personality
◦ User Liquid - Configurable fluid type for user-defined liquids.
◦ User Vapor - Configurable fluid type for user-defined vapors.
◦ User Gas - Configurable fluid type for user-defined gases.
• Steam Personality
◦ Saturated Steam - Non-configurable fluid type for steam in a saturated
condition.
◦ Superheated Steam - Non-configurable fluid type for steam in a super heated
condition.
70 MI 019-222
• Oil & Gas Personality

◦ User Liquid - Configurable fluid type for user-defined liquids.
You can configure User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas. Saturated Steam and
Superheated Stream are predefined (see Default Configuration Databases, page 71).
The following parameters can be set for the user configurable fluid types:
• Thermal Coefficient of Density (ThCoefD)
• Reference Temperature of Density (ThRefTD)
• Reference Density of Liquid (ThRefD)
• Thermal Coefficient of Viscosity (ThCoefV)
• Reference Temperature for Viscosity (ThRefTV))
• Reference Viscosity of Liquid (ThRefV)
These parameters do not appear in the menu tree for predefined fluid types.
Default Configuration Databases

Each flowmeter is shipped with an operating configured database. However, the
flowmeter may not be configured for the actual fluid and flow conditions of your
application.
NOTE: Check the configuration of your flowmeter before start-up.
If information is not supplied with the purchase order, the flowmeter is shipped with the
defaults in the following tables. These defaults are not recommended for general
operation. If no other process information is available, entering User Liquid, User
Vapor, User Gas, SaturatedSteam or SuperHeatedSteam as the fluid type during
configuration establishes the default databases as shown in the following tables.
Table 33 - Default Database for User Liquid
Parameter Metric U.S.

Fluid Type User Liquid (Default Water) User Liquid (Default Water)
Type of Flow Volume Volume
Measurement Units m3/s gal/min
Flowing Temperature 15ºC 159ºF
Flowing Density 999.14 kg/m3 62.37 lb/ft3
Absolute Viscosity 1.14 cP
Upper Range Value Upper Range Limit for Flowmeter Size
Pressure 101.00 kPaa 14.65 psia
Heat Content26 0 Joules/kg 0 BTU/lb
Table 34 - Default Database for User Vapor

Fluid Type User Vapor (Default Steam) User Vapor (Default Steam)
Type of Flow Same as present configuration
Measurement Units Same as present configuration
Flowing Temperature 178ºC 352.4ºF
26. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Liquid.
MI 019-222 71
Table 34 - Default Database for User Vapor (Continued)

Table 35 - Default Database for User Gas

Fluid Type User Gas (Default Air) User Gas (Default Air)
Measurement Units Same as present configuration28
Flowing Temperature 20ºC 68ºF
Table 36 - Default Database for Saturated Steam

Fluid Type SaturatedSteam SaturatedSteam
Flowing Density 4.94kg/m3 0.31 lb/ft3
Pressure 957.34kPaa 138.85 psia
Heat Content 2775400.00 Joules/kg 1193207.22 BTU/lb
Table 37 - Default Database for Superheated Steam

Fluid Type SuperHeatedSteam SuperHeatedSteam
Flowing Density 4.94kg/m3 0.31 lb/ft3
27. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Vapor.
28. Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable to gas.
29. Heat Content is a valid measurement only for steam. Set it to 0 for User Gas.
30. Liquid units of gallons, liters, imperial gallons, or barrels per unit time are not transferable to steam.
72 MI 019-222
Table 37 - Default Database for Superheated Steam (Continued)

Pressure 957.34kPaa 138.85 psia
Heat Content 2775490.25 Joules/kg 1193246.02 BTU/lb
Example: Configuring a User-Defined Fluid

Set up a user-configurable fluid type with the following characteristics:
ThRefTD (Reference ThRefD (Reference ThCoefD Density

Temperature) Density of the Liquid) (Δ Density/
Δ Temperature)
75 ºF 49.0172 lbs/ft3 -0.034529561 lbs/ft3/ºF 49.0172 lbs/ft3
The following formula calculates the density values for a user defined fluid:
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature – ThRefTD) * ThCoefD
Refer to the diagram.
Figure 35 - Calculating Density Values
Density slope
Temperature
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature – ThRefTD) x slope

where slope = ThCoefD = Δ Density/Δ Temperature
For a detailed example of how to achieve a 4 to 20 analog output for Mass Flow, pulse
output for Mass Flow, and how to display Total Mass using the local display, see
Configuration Example, page 109.
Updating Fluid Parameters

To update fluid parameters:
MI 019-222 73
1. Configure the parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Fluid menu selection (local
display) or the Detailed Setup > Fluid menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Fluid Menu Diagram, page 117 for the menu on the local display for the
General or Steam personalities. The Fluid menu is not available for the Oil & Gas
personality. See HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the
HART Communicator.
2. For the Flow Temperature, Density, Pressure and Viscosity parameters listed
below, configure the properties in Measurement Properties, page 69. Refer to the
menu diagrams for the specific properties that apply to each parameter.
NOTE: For convenience, the following measurement parameters can be
configured from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration
menus:
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
Table 38 - Fluid Parameters
Local Display HART Factory Default Description

Communicator
3 Fluid Fluid Type (Default value Fluid Type: Select the type of fluid: User Liquid, User Vapor, User
varies based on Gas, SaturatedSteam or SuperHeatedSteam. Default values for
the personality these fluid types are listed in the tables in Default Configuration
selected.) Databases, page 71. User Liquid, User Vapor, and SselectionUser
Gas are user configurable fluid types, while SaturatedSteam and
SuperHeatedSteam are predefined.
Only User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas are available in the
General personality. Only SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam
are available in the Steam personality. The Fluid menu is not available
for the Oil & Gas personality.
3 Name Fluid Name Default Water Fluid Name: Enter a name for this fluid (optional).
3 Config FlwTmp Temperature Config EGU: degF Flow Temperature: Configure the measurement properties associated
with the flow temperature.
LRV: N/A
Depending on whether the Vortex flowmeter is configured with an RTD
URV: N/A for multivariable temperature compensation, this parameter either
displays the temperature of the flowing process material or allows you
Default: 59 to enter a flow temperature.
4AlertSt: N/A For a flowmeter with temperature compensation (Multivariable
Selection T), the Flow Temperature shows the temperature of the
CMethod: N/A process material flowing through the Vortex meter. For a flowmeter
without temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection N), enter
Damp: None the flow temperature in this parameter in the specified units.
3 BasTmp Base Temperature 59 Base Temperature: Enter the base temperature in the temperature
unit specified.
3 Config Densty Density Config EGU: lb/ft3 Density: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
density of the fluid.
LRV: N/A
If you configure the calculation method to User On, be sure to enter the
URV: N/A reference density (ThRefD), reference temperature (ThRefTD), and the
thermal coefficient of density (ThCoefD).
Default: 62.372
If you choose to use a custom density unit, define your custom unit by
4AlertSt: N/A first entering a Label for your custom unit using up to eight
alphanumeric characters. Then, enter any Offset and a conversion
CMethod: N/A factor (Slope) to convert from kilograms per cubic meter to the custom
unit.
Damp: None
3 BasDen Base Density 62.372 Base Density: Enter the base density in the density unit specified.
74 MI 019-222
Table 38 - Fluid Parameters (Continued)

Communicator
3 Config Press Pressure Config EGU: kPaa Pressure: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
pressure of the fluid.
LRV: N/A
Pressure can be configured once using this command or a Host system
URV: N/A can be used to update Pressure remotely using HART command 192
(see Setting Digital Measurement Values Remotely, page 159).
Default:
100.1010
4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: N/A
Damp: None
3 BasPrs Base Pressure 100.1010 Base Pressure: Enter the base pressure in the unit specified.
3 Config Visc Viscosity Config EGU: cPoise Viscosity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
viscosity of the fluid.
Default: 1.1219
If you configure the Calculation Method to User On, be sure to enter the
4AlertSt: N/A reference viscosity (ThRefV), reference temperature (ThRefTV), and
the thermal coefficient of viscosity (ThCoefV).
CMethod: N/A
3ThCoefD Thermal Coef Density -0.0191111 Thermal Coefficient of Density, Reference Temperature of Density,
and Reference Density of Liquid: These parameters apply to
3ThRefTD Thermal Dens Ref 58.99996 configurable fluid types only (User Liquid, User Vapor, and User
Temp Gas).
3 ThRefD Thermal Density 62.37183 The Vortex Model 84C Flowmeter uses the following thermo-coefficient
equation to apply temperature correction for density (for liquids only):
Density = ThRefD + (Current Temperature - ThRefTD) * ThCoefD
See Calculating Density Values, page 73.
where:
• ThRefD is the reference density of the liquid
• ThRefTD is the reference temperature
• ThCoefD = Δ Density / Δ Temperature
3ThCoefV Thermal Coef -0.006316 Thermal Coefficient of Viscosity, Reference Temperature of

Viscosity Viscosity, and Reference Viscosity of Liquid: These parameters
apply to configurable fluid types only (User Liquid, User Vapor, and
3ThRefTV Thermal Visc Ref 59.99990 User Gas).
Temp
Use these parameters only if you expect to have Reynolds Number
3 ThRefV Thermal Ref Viscosity 1.121900 Correction turned on and expect to have a Reynolds Number of less
than 20,000. For more information, see Setting Tuning Parameters,
page 76.
The flowmeter uses the following thermo-coefficient equation to apply

temperature correction for viscosity (for liquids only):
Viscosity = ThRefV + (Current Temperature - ThRefTV) * ThCoefV

where:
where:
• ThRefV is the reference viscosity of the liquid
• ThRefTV is the reference temperature
• ThCoefV = Δ Viscosity / Δ Temperature
MI 019-222 75
Setting Tuning Parameters

The Tuning function allows you to turn the Reynolds number correction feature on or
off and set the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI).31
Configure the Tuning parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Tuning menu selection (local
display) or the Detailed Setup > Tuning menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Tuning Menu Diagram, page 122 for the menu on the local display for the
General and Steam personalities, see the Tuning Menu Diagram, page 149 for the
menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality, and see HART Communicator
Table 39 - Tuning Parameters

Communicator
3 Rd Corr (General Reynolds Correction Off Reynolds number correction: Set the Reynolds number correction to
and Steam On or Off.
personalities only)
3MaxRate (Oil & Gas Max Rate The Liquid upper Maximum Flow Rate, same as upper range value.
personality only) range value for
the flow meter.
(line size
dependent)
3MxRt Hz (Oil & Gas Pulse Max Line size Pulse output frequency that corresponds to the Max Rate flowing rate
personality only) dependent. (3MaxRate).
3 LFCI > 4 FlowEGU LFCI gal/m (for LFCI Flow Units: Set the flow units associated with the LFCI.
General and
Steam
personalitites)
and bbl/d (for Oil
& Gas
personality)
3 LFCI > 4Setting LFCI - Setting LFCI 4 LFCI Settings: Set the LFCI setting (LFCI 1 through LFCI 8). Higher
settings reject more noise, but also require a higher flow before flow is
detected.
3 LFCI > 4 LfUFac (Oil LfUFac 1.0000000 LFCI User Factor per Model 84C Special Flowtube Confgurator.
& Gas personality
only)
3 FlwDmp (Oil & Gas Filter None Flow Damping Time: Select the damping factor. Choose 0 to 32
personality only) seconds.
3 Filter (Oil & Gas Flow Damp FixGas Filter Mode: Choices are:
personality only)
• Normal: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter Limit = User URV).
• FixGas: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter Limit = Air URL).
• DynGas: Noise Filter On (Base Low Filter switches).
• Off: Noise Filter off.
You can also set LFCI automatically. See Calibration and Test, page 97.
Setting Measurement Parameters

If you map output to anything other than Flow Temperature and then change fluid
parameters, the output may be affected. Check the measurement configuration
settings for all mapped measurements.
31. LFCI is also known as Low Flow Cut Off (LFCO).
76 MI 019-222
Updating Measurement Parameters

To update measurement parameters:
1. Navigate to the 1 Setup > 2Measure > 3MeasCfg menu selection (local display)
or the Detailed Status > Measurement menu selection (HART Communicator)
and configure flow damping. Choose from None, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 (factory default),
4, 8, 16, or 32.
Flow damping is applied to volumetric flow, mass flow, and heat flow
measurements. Flow damping does not apply to Raw measurements.
2. Configure the other measurement parameters below from the 1 Setup >
2Measure > 3MeasCfg menu selection (local display) or the Detailed Status >
Measurement menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Measurement Configuration Menu Diagram, page 123 for the menu on
the local display for the General and Steam personality, see the Oil Gas Main
Menu, page 148 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality,
and see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART
Communicator.
For each parameter listed below, configure the properties provided in
Measurement Properties, page 69. Refer to the menu diagrams for the specific
properties that apply to each parameter.
NOTE: For convenience, the following measurement parameters can be
configured from either the Fluid menu or the Measurement Configuration
menus:
• Density
• Pressure
• Viscosity
Table 40 - Measurement Parameters

Communicator
4 Config FlwVol FlowVol Config EGU: gal/m Flow Volume: Configure the measurement properties associated with
the volumetric flow.
URV: N/A
Default: 0
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config FlwBVo (Not FlowBaseVol Config EGUTYP: StdVol Base Volumetric Flow: Configure the measurement properties
available in Steam associated with the base volumetric flow.
personality) EGU: Sgal/m
URV: N/A
Default: 0
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config Press Pressure Config EGU: kPaa Pressure: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
pressure of the fluid.
LRV: N/A
Pressure can be configured once using this command or a Host system
URV: N/A can be used to update Pressure remotely using HART command 192
(see Setting Digital Measurement Values Remotely, page 159).
Default:
100.1010
4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: N/A
Damp: None
MI 019-222 77
Table 40 - Measurement Parameters (Continued)

Communicator
4 Config FlwTmp Flow Temp Config EGU: degF Flow Temperature: Configure the measurement properties associated
with the flow temperature.
LRV: N/A
Depending on whether the Vortex flowmeter is configured with an RTD
URV: N/A for multivariable temperature compensation, this parameter either
displays the temperature of the flowing process material or allows you
Default: 59 to enter a flow temperature.
4AlertSt: N/A For a flowmeter with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection
T), the Flow Temperature shows the temperature of the process
CMethod: N/A material flowing through the Vortex meter. For a flowmeter without
temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection N), enter the flow
Damp: None temperature in this parameter in the specified units.
4 Config Densty Density Config EGU: lb/ft3 Density: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
density of the fluid.
LRV: N/A
If you configure the calculation method to User On, be sure to enter the
URV: N/A reference density (ThRefD), reference temperature (ThRefTD), and the
thermal coefficient of density (ThCoefD).
Default: 62.372
If you choose to use a custom density unit, define your custom unit by
4AlertSt: N/A first entering a Label for your custom unit using up to eight
alphanumeric characters. Then, enter any Offset and a conversion
CMethod: N/A factor (Slope) to convert from kilograms per cubic meter to the custom
unit.
Damp: None
4 Config FlwMas Flow Mass Config EGU: lb/h Mass Flow: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
mass flow measurement.
URV: N/A
Default: 59
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config Velcty Velocity Config EGU: ft/s Velocity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
velocity.
URV: N/A
4AlertSt: N/A
4 Config Visc Viscosity Config EGU: cPoise Viscosity: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
viscosity of the fluid.
Default: 1.1219
If you configure the Calculation Method to User On, be sure to enter the
4AlertSt: N/A reference viscosity (ThRefV), reference temperature (ThRefTV), and
the thermal coefficient of viscosity (ThCoefV).
CMethod: N/A
4 Config Raw Raw Frequency EGU: Hz Raw Vortex Frequency: Configure the measurement properties
associated with the raw vortex frequency.
URV: N/A
4 Config EleTemp Ele Temp Config EGU: degF Electronics Temperature: Configure the measurement properties
associated with the temperature of the electronics module.
LRV: N/A
URV: N/A
Default: 70
4AlertSt: N/A
Damp: None
78 MI 019-222
Table 40 - Measurement Parameters (Continued)

Communicator
4 Config HtCon Heat Content Config EGU: degF Heat Content:32 Configure the measurement properties associated with
the heat content.
LRV: N/A
URV: N/A
Default: Fluid
based (0 for
custom fluids)
4AlertSt: N/A
CMethod: N/A
4 Config HtFlow Heat Flow Config EGU: J/sec Heat Flow: Configure the measurement properties associated with the
heat flow.
LRV: N/A
URV: N/A
4AlertSt: N/A
2 FlwEGU (Available Flow Vol Units bbl/d Flowmeter EGU: (Applies to Oil & Gas personality only) Select an
for Oil & Gas appropriate engineering unit for Oil and Gas applications.
personality only. This
parameter is accessed
from the 1 OilGas > 2
FlwEGU menu
selection.)
Setting Totalizer Parameters

The flowmeter provides three separate totalizers that track various measurements as
material flows through the meter. You can map each of the totalizers independently to
track different flow measurements. For example, one totalizer can track the total
volume of material that flows through the transmitter while another totalizer can track
the total mass.
• When totalizing Heat Flow, the result is the total amount of Energy in the form of
heat that has been transferred with the flowing fluid.
• Mass Flow is totalized to Mass.
• Velocity is the only rate that is not totalized.
• When using the Oil & Gas personality, the flowmeter supports a single totalizer
labeled “Total” which is always mapped to Volumetric flow. The Total EGU follows
the Volume Rate EGU (for example, bbl/d will result in a total in barrels).
In addition to the values that the totalizer accumulates, each totalizer also has a status
describing the validity of the totalizer’s value at a particular point in time, and a two-
digit rollover counter. Each totalizer’s value, status, and rollover counter value can be
displayed using a variety of methods.
You can assign any totalizer’s output to the HART secondary, tertiary, or quaternary
variables (SV, TV, or QV). By default, the output of Totalizer 1 is mapped to the HART
SV and the output of Totalizer 2 is mapped to the HART TV.
You can perform the following operations on totalizers:
• Starting totalizer accumulation
• Stopping totalizer accumulation
• Resuming totalizer accumulation
32. This measurement only applies to steam (SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam). Set HtCon to 0 for User Liquid, User Vapor, and User
Gas.
MI 019-222 79
• Clearing existing totals

See Totalizer Actions, page 100 for more information.
You can also configure each totalizer independently with the following operations:
• Changing engineering units
• Changing totalizer mapping
• Changing display formats, which also sets the rollover limit
Totalizer values, both reported and intermediate, as well as configuration and status
information are persistent and are maintained over a flowmeter power cycle. An alert
appears if a totalizer is turned on during a power cycle.
If a totalizer is on and the flowmeter enters an offline state:
• Totalizers that are currently on are turned off.
• The totalizer is not cleared and its value remains at the last known value, as long
as the totalizer configuration is not changed. The totalizer is not cleared and its
value remains at the last known value.
• Totalizer status is set to either the status at the time the flowmeter went offline or
W:Offline, whichever is worse.
• If the totalizer configuration changes, for example, if you change totalizer
mapping, engineering units, or rollover limits, the totalizer is cleared and its value
is set back to zero, even if you ultimately cancel the totalizer configuration
change.
When the flowmeter returns to an online state, the totalizer remains off.
Controlling Access to Totalizer Configuration and Data

You can control access to totalizer configuration and data by moving a write protect
jumper in the flowmeter hardware. When using the local display, you can also control
access by configuring passwords. Such safeguards are important when using
totalizers for custody transfer applications, where the total flow of a material from one
place to another needs to be carefully and accurately tracked, or to prevent
unintentional or malicious changes to configuration and data.
For information on setting the jumper to the protect or write positions, refer to Setting
the Write Protect Jumper, page 52.
For information on controlling totalizer access using passwords on the local display,
see Totalizer Access Restrictions, page 107.
Totalizer Display Options

Totalizers accumulate data from their mapped flow in one of the following user-
configurable formats:
• XXXXXXX
• XXXXXX.X
• XXXXX.XX
• XXXX.XXX
• XXX.XXXX
• XX.XXXXX
• X.XXXXXX
Each display format has a rollover counter and a built in rollover limit. For example, if
you set the display format to XXX.XXXX, values up to 999.9999 will appear on the
display. For values of 1,000 and above, a rollover counter is incremented and the
totals that appear on the display restart at 0.
80 MI 019-222
Since the rollover counter is a two-digit number on the local display, the maximum
value the rollover counter can reach is 99. For rollover counters above 99, RO **
appears on the local display, but the flowmeter continues to accumulate totals and
increment the rollover counter, and the totalizer value continues to appear on the
display. You can find the true value of a saturated rollover counter by using the HART
Communicator (go to the Diag/Service > Totalizers menu selection and choose the
appropriate Totalizer x RO value, where x = 1, 2 or 3).
Note that totalizer display formats cannot be changed while the totalizer is on.
Instructions for configuring display formats for totalizers and other measurements are
provided in Configuring the Home Screen, page 90.
Totalizer Status
Totalizer Status describes the validity of the totalizer value at a particular time. In order
of least to most severe, a totalizer’s status can be:
• OK
• ALERT
• BAD
A totalizer’s status is “sticky,” meaning that a totalizer’s status will persist even if the
condition causing the alert condition has cleared. For example, you may see a
message indicating the mapped source’s value has reached its configured hard upper
limit since last clearing the totalizer. The totalizer must be explicitly cleared in order for
its status to change.
Generally, totalizers inherit the status of their mapped flow measurement, with a few
exceptions. First, if a flow measurement mapped to a totalizer has an OUT OF
SERVICE status, the totalizer’s status will be BAD. Additionally, a totalizer may set its
status to a higher severity than that of the mapped flow measurement based on
totalizer operation.
Like totalizer values, totalizer status persists across a flowmeter power cycle.
Configuring a Totalizer (T1, T2, or T3)

Configure each totalizer as follows:
NOTE: Be aware that changing the totalizer configuration using this procedure will
turn the totalizer off and clear it.
MI 019-222 81
1. Configure each totalizer from the 1 Setup > 2 Total > 3 Tot1 (or 3 Tot2 or 3 Tot3)
menu selection (local display) or the Detailed Setup > Totalizers menu selection
(HART Communicator).
See the Totalizer Configuration Menu Diagram, page 133 for the menu for the
General or Steam personalities. The Totalizer Configuration menu is not available
for the Oil & Gas personality. See HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the
menus on the HART Communicator.
Table 41 - Totalizer Parameters (for Totalizer 1, Totalizer 2, and Totalizer 3)

Communicator
4 Map Totalizer x Map, where Volume Map Totalizer: Allows you to map each totalizer to a measurement.
x=1, 2, or 3. Choose Volume, BVolume, Mass, Vor Cnt, or Energy.
When mapping a totalizer, consider the following guidelines:

• You cannot map a totalizer to a measurement that uses custom
units at the time of mapping. If you want the mapped
measurement to use custom units, configure the custom units
after mapping the measurement to the totalizer.
• You cannot map one totalizer as an input to another totalizer.
• You cannot map two or more totalizers to the same measurement.
4 EGU Totalizer x Units, gal Engineering Units: Allows you to configure units for each totalizer.
where x=1, 2, or 3. Initially , each totalizer’s EGUs are set to a non-rate version of the
mapped measurement’s default units. For example, if you mapped a
totalizer to Volume and the volumentric flow EGU is configured to cubic
feet per second, the totalizer’s EGU is set to cubic feet by default.
If you select Custom, define the custom unit first. First, enter a label for
your custom units, using up to eight alphanumeric characters. Then,
enter any offset and conversion factor (slope) to convert from base units
to your custom units in kilograms (for mass units) or cubic meters (for
volume or base volume units).
For example, The slope for a custom unit of a 42 gallon barrel would be
6.2898 because 6.2898 bbl =1 m3.
2. If desired, configure access to the totalizer configuration and data:

a. For information on installing the write protect jumper, see Setting the Write
Protect Jumper, page 52.
b. For information on configuring passwords (local display only), see Using
Passwords, page 105.
3. If desired, configure the totalizer display options, which also sets the rollover limit.
See Configuring the Home Screen, page 90.
4. To turn the totalizer on, see Totalizer Actions, page 100.
Setting Output Parameters

The Output function allows you to configure communication parameters (including
mapping measurements to HART outputs), mA output, pulse output, and display
parameters.
Mapping Measurements to HART Outputs

You can map four separate flowmeter measurements to specific HART output
variables: primary variable (PV), secondary variable (SV), tertiary variable (TV), and
quaternary variable (QV). The measurement that is mapped to the PV will drive the 4
to 20 mA analog output.
82 MI 019-222
NOTE: When a measurement is mapped to the PV, the Alert Strategy (AlertSt) will
be set to On Alert (AlertBad). This is to ensure notification via the configured
NAMUR settings.
This table shows the measurements and the HART outputs to which each
measurement can be mapped. You can map outputs to only one measurement at a
time.
Table 42 - Mapping Measurements to HART Outputs
Measurement HART (mA) PV HART SV HART TV HART QV
Volumetric Flow Rate Yes (Default) Yes Yes Yes

(VolFlow)
Base Volumetric Flow Yes Yes Yes Yes

Rate (BVolFlow)
Mass Flow Rate Yes Yes Yes Yes

(MassFlow)
Velocity Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pressure (via HART) Yes Yes Yes
Flow (Process) Temp. Yes Yes Yes Yes

(FlwTmp)
Density Yes Yes Yes
Viscosity Yes Yes Yes
Electronics Temp. Yes Yes Yes
Heat Content Yes Yes Yes

Heat Flow Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reynolds Yes Yes Yes
Totalizer1 Yes (Default) Yes Yes
Totalizer2 Yes Yes (Default) Yes
Totalizer3 Yes Yes Yes

mA Output
Pulse Output (Pulse) Yes Yes Yes
Raw Vortex
Vortex Signal (Vor Freq) Yes Yes Yes Yes (Default)
Rtd Ohms Yes Yes Yes

1/Kref (K Actual) Yes Yes Yes
K Flowing
Map the measurements to HART outputs one measurement at a time from the
1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Coms > 4Com Map menu selection (local display) or from
the Detailed Setup > Output Configuration > Digital Output menu selection (HART
Communicator).
See the Communications Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page 134 for
the menus on the local display for the General and Steam personalities, see the
Output Menus - Communication Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page
151 for the menus on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality, and see HART
Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART Communicator.
MI 019-222 83
Table 43 - Parameters for Mapping Measurements to HART Outputs

Communicator
5 Map PV mA/PV Map VolFlow Map Primary Variable: Map a valid measurement to the HART primary
variable. This measurement drives the 4 to 20 mA output.
5 Map SV SV Map Totalizer1 Map Secondary Variable: Map a valid measurement to the HART
secondary variable.
5 Map TV TV Map Totalizer2 Map Tertiary Variable: Map a valid measurement to the HART tertiary
variable.
5 Map QV QV Map VorFreq Map Quaternary Variable: Map a valid measurement to the HART
quaternary variable.
Setting Communication Parameters

1. Configure the Communications parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3
Coms menu selection (local display) or the Detailed Setup >
Output Configuration > HART Output menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the HART Communication and Tag Configuration Menu Diagram, page 136
for the menu on the local display for the General and Steam personalities, see the
Output Menus - HART Communication and Tag Configuration Menu Diagram,
page 150 for the menu on the local display for the Oil and Gas personality, and
see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART
Communicator.
Table 44 - Communication Parameters

Communicator
4PolAdr Poll addr 0 Poll Address: Specify the poll address from a list of numbers from
0 to 63.
4Preambl Num req preams 5 Preambles: Set the number of preambles between 2 and 20.
4LoopCur Loop current mode Enabled Loop Current: Enable or disable Loop Current Mode. By default, this
parameter is enabled and the flowmeter operates with a 4 to 20 mA
output signal. To lock the flowmeter’s mA output to a fixed value of
3.8 mA, disable Loop Current Mode.
2. Configure the HART identification parameters from the 1 Setup > 2 Output >
3 Coms > 4 Tags menu selection (local display) or the Detailed Setup >
Output Configuration > Device Information menu selection (HART
Communicator).
Table 45 - Identification Parameters

Communicator
5HartTag Tag N/A HART Tag: Set the HART tag (up to 8 characters).
5HartLtg Long Tag N/A HART Long Tag: Set the HART long tag (up to 32 characters).
4HartMsg Message N/A HART Message: Set the HART message (up to 32 characters).
5HartDes Descriptor N/A HART Descriptor: Set the HART device descriptor (up to
16 characters).
84 MI 019-222
Configuring mA Output
Configure mA output from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 mA menu selection (local
display) or the Detailed Setup > Output Configuration > Analog Output menu
selection (HART Communicator).
NOTE: You cannot configure the mA output with Low Power flowmeters or if Loop
Current Mode is disabled.
See the mA Output Configuration Menu Diagram, page 137 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities, see the Output Menus - mA Output
Configuration Menu Diagram, page 153 for the menu on the local display for the Oil &
Gas personality, and see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus
on the HART Communicator.
Table 46 - mA Outputs

Communicator
4 Map mA/PV Map VolFlow Measurements to Map: Select the measurement to which you want to
map the mA output: VolFlow, BVolFlow, FlwTmp, MassFlow, Velocity,
Vor Freq, or HeatFlow.
• You cannot map the mA output to flow temperature (FlwTmp)
unless your flowmeter is configured to measure process
temperature (Multivariable T model code selection).
• When a measurement is mapped to the mA output, the Alert
Strategy (AlertSt) is set to On Alert (AlertBad) to ensure
notification via the configured NAMUR settings.
4 Damp mA Damp No Damping: Select the damping factor (10 to 32 seconds).
4Fail N/A DwnScale Failure: Configure the mA output to go downscale (low) or upscale
(high) upon a failure. This parameter is only available when Loop
Current Mode is enabled.
Configuring Pulse Output

The flowmeter produces a pulse signal in addition to the standard signal. You can
configure the flowmeter’s pulse output to one of the following modes:
• Pulse Output, Raw mode generates a pulse frequency according to the
detected raw vortex frequency after filtering according to the low flow cut-in
(LFCI) parameter.
• Pulse Output, Pulse mode generates one pulse output per given quantity of
material flowing through the sensor. Valid measurement mappings are shown in
the table.
• Pulse Output, Frequency mode generates a pulse frequency proportional to a
mapped measurement. Valid measurement mappings are shown in the table.
• None allows you to turn off the pulse output capability. When Pulse Output is off,
the flowmeter maintains its digital output continuously in the non-conductive
state.
Table 47 - Mapping Measurements to Pulse Outputs
Measurement Raw Mode Pulse Mode Freq Mode
Volume Rate (VolFlow) Yes (Default) Yes (Default)
Base Volume Rate Yes Yes

Mass Flow Rate Yes Yes
Pressure Yes
Flow (Process) Temp Yes
Density Yes
MI 019-222 85
Table 47 - Mapping Measurements to Pulse Outputs (Continued)
Measurement Raw Mode Pulse Mode Freq Mode
Raw Vortex Yes Yes

Vortex Signal Yes Yes
Heat Content Yes

Heat Flow Yes Yes
Configuring Pulse Output, Raw Mode

Use Pulse Output, Raw mode if you want to generate a pulse frequency according to
the detected raw vortex frequency.
To configure raw mode, navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse > 4 Pulse
menu (local display) or Device Setup > Detailed Status > Pulse Output >
Pulse Mode menu (HART Communicator), and select Raw as the type of pulse
output.
(Applies to local display only) When the flowmeter enters an offline state (for example,
if you enter the Setup or Cal/Test menus), Pulse Output becomes zero. When the
flowmeter returns to an online state, the Pulse Output returns to the raw output.
Configuring Pulse Output, Pulse Mode

Use Pulse Output, Pulse mode if you want to track the total quantity of material
flowing through the sensor and generate individual pulse output signals for each fixed
quantity of material that flows through the sensor.
Consider the following points when using Pulse Output, Pulse mode:
• Turning Pulse Output, Pulse mode On clears the accumulated pulse output
values. Resume turns Pulse mode on without clearing the values. To turn Pulse
Output, Pulse mode on, see Pulse Actions, page 100.
• The Pulse Factor parameter allows you to configure either the number of flow
units one pulse output signal represents (units per pulse) or the number of pulse
output signals that represent a single unit of flow (pulses per unit).
• The Pulse Factor’s engineering units are configured in the Pulse Factor Units
parameter.
◦ When you initially enter Pulse mode, the Pulse Factor engineering units
parameter is set to the non-rate version of the currently mapped source’s
engineering units (EGUs). For example, if pulse output is mapped to VolFlow
and the units for volumetric flow are gallons per second, the Pulse Factor
engineering units parameter is set to gallons.
– If the mapped source is configured with custom units at the time of
mapping, mapping will not be allowed. The mapped source EGU can be
changed to custom units after mapping, but this will have no effect on the
Pulse Factor engineering units parameter.
◦ The Pulse Factor engineering units parameter is set automatically when
entering Pulse mode, or when mapping or remapping the pulse output.
However, the Pulse Factor engineering units parameter does not
automatically update when the units associated with the mapped source
change.
◦ You can also set the Pulse Factor engineering units parameter from a list of
options when you are configuring Pulse output, Pulse mode.
86 MI 019-222
• Because the pulse duty cycle is fixed at 50%, configuring the minimum pulse
width can limit the frequency of the pulse output. The pulse width limits the
frequency of the pulse output because of the signal’s 50% duty cycle. For
example, configuring a pulse width of 50 ms means that the fastest the pulse
signal will be sent out is at 10 Hz: 1/(2 x 0.05 s) = 10 Hz
The following table shows the minimum pulse width settings and their maximum
frequency equivalents. Alternatively, you can select a custom pulse width
between 0.05 and 500 ms.
NOTE: If the value of the rate measurement mapped to the Pulse Output
exceeds its Upper Range Value, the actual pulse output frequency may
exceed the maximum frequency shown in the table by up to 5%.
Table 48 - Minimum Pulse Widths and Maximum Frequency Equivalents
Minimum Pulse Width Maximum Frequency Equivalent
0.05 ms 10,000 Hz
0.5 ms 1,000 Hz
5 ms 100 Hz
50 ms 10 Hz
Custom (user entered value between 0.05 ms 10 Hz – 10,000 Hz
and 50 ms)
• As shown in Pulse Output Mapping to Rate Measurement, page 87, the Pulse
Factor setting (Pulse Factor Units per Pulse or Pulse Factor Pulses per Unit) and
Minimum Pulse Width settings are bounded such that the Maximum Frequency
represents at most the Upper Range Value and at least, the minimum span of the
mapped measurement.
Any attempt to set the Pulse Factor or Minimum Pulse Width to a value would
require:
◦ A Pulse Frequency greater than the Maximum Frequency to represent the
mapped measurement’s Upper Range, or
◦ A Pulse Frequency less than the Minimum Frequency to represent the
mapped measurement’s minimum span will be rejected by the transmitter.
Figure 36 - Pulse Output Mapping to Rate Measurement
Upper Range Limit

Minimum Span
Upper Range Value
Rate Measurement mapped to Pulse Output

0 In User EGU (i.e. gallons per second)
Flow Operating Region
FacP/U or FacP/U in non-rate User EGU (i.e. gallons)
Pulse Output region

Max. Frequency (Min. Pulse Width in ms)
Pulse Output Frequency (Hz)

0
Upper Range Value
Minimum Span Frequency Equivalent Frequency Equivalent
Limits for Max. Frequency calculated from

the Rate Measurement Minimum Span and
Upper Range Value using the Pulse Factor
MI 019-222 87
• When the transmitter enters an offline state, for example, if you enter the Setup
menu, the following actions are taken, even if you ultimately cancel the
configuration change.
◦ Pulse Output is turned off and becomes zero.
◦ Pulse output status is set to the worse of W:Offline and status before it went
offline.
◦ When the transmitter returns to an online state, Pulse Output remains off and
remains at zero, and the status remains set.
• If the pulse output configuration changes, for example, if you change pulse output
mapping, the pulse output is cleared and its value is set back to zero, even if you
ultimately cancel the configuration change.
• If the flowmeter has an alert, the following occurs:
◦ Output will be set to 0 Hz. The Pulse Output does not accumulate for the
duration of the alert.
◦ A status is set.
◦ A diagnostic alert will be set by the source of the alert.
◦ If the flowmeter recovers from the alert, the original output will resume, but the
status and diagnostic error remain.
◦ Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
represent a valid flow measurement.
◦ Similar to totalizers, the pulse accumulation can be stopped and resumed.
Configure Pulse Output, Pulse mode from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse menu
selection (local display) or the Device Setup > Detailed Setup >
Output Configuration > Pulse Output menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Configuration Menu Diagram, page 138 for the
menu on the local display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse Output,
Pulse Mode Configuration menu is not available for the Oil and Gas personality. See
the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART
Communicator.
Table 49 - Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Parameters

Communicator
4 Pulse Pulse Mode Freq Pulse Mode: Select Pulse to configure the Pulse Output to pulse
mode.
4MapPul Pulse Map VolFlow Pulse Map: Select the measurement to which you want to map the
pulse output. Choose VolFlow, BVolFlow, MassFlow, Vor Freq, or Heat
Flow.
4PWidth Pulse Width 5 ms Pulse Width: Select the pulse width, which is a function of the mapped
flow rate, how much flow each pulse represents, and the maximum
pulse frequency. Choose standard pulse widths of 0.05, 0.5, 5, or
50 ms, or select Custom. Keep in mind that configuring the pulse width
may also limit the frequency of the pulse output because of the signal’s
50% duty cycle. See Minimum Pulse Widths and Maximum Frequency
Equivalents, page 87.
4FacEGU Fac Units gal Pulse Factor Units: Select the engineering units that the Pulse Factor
will (see the Pulse Factor Units Per Pulse or Pulse Factor Pulses per
Unit parameters below). If possible, this parameter is initially set to the
non-rate version of the currently configured mapped source’s EGUs.
For example, if Pulse Output is mapped to VolFlow and the units for
volumetric flow are gallons per second, Pulse Factor Units would be
gallons.
88 MI 019-222
Table 49 - Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Parameters (Continued)

Communicator
4 FacU/P Fac Units per Pulse 1 Pulse Factor Units per Pulse and Pulse Factor Pulses per Unit:
Enter the Pulse Factor. You can choose to configure the number of flow
4 FacP/U Fac Pulses per Unit 1 units one pulse output signal represents (units per pulse) or conversely,
you can configure the number of pulse output signals that represent a
single unit of flow (pulses per unit).
• If you want to configure the number of units per pulse, navigate to
units per pulse and enter the number of flow units represented by
one pulse signal. The opposite Pulse Factor, pulses per unit,
updates automatically.
• If you want to configure the number of pulses per unit, navigate to
pulses per unit and enter the number of pulses that will represent
one unit of flow. The opposite Pulse Factor, units per pulse,
updates automatically.
Configuring Pulse Output, Frequency Mode

Use Pulse Output, Frequency mode if you want to generate a pulse frequency
proportional to a mapped measurement.
Consider the following points when using Pulse Output, Frequency mode:
• (Applies to local display only) When the flowmeter enters an offline state, for
example if you select the Setup or Calibration/Test menus, pulse output becomes
zero. When the flowmeter returns to an online state, the pulse output returns to
the calculated pulse frequency.
• Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
• If the output frequency is less than 0.5 Hz, the pulse output is held permanently
non-conducting.
• Pulse output produces outputs up to 125% of the pulse URV. For example, if the
pulse URV is 100 Hz, the flowmeter will continue to transmit a linear output up to
125 Hz, but will not exceed 125 Hz.
• If the source measurement AlertSt is set to AlertBad and the source
measurement has an alert, the following occurs:
◦ Output will be set to the user-selected default frequency; however, the pulse
output signal transmitted will be 0 or ≥ 150% of the pulse URV.
◦ A status is set.
◦ A diagnostic alert will be set by the source of the alert.
◦ If the flowmeter recovers from the alert, the original output will resume and the
status returns to OK, but the diagnostic alert remains.
• If the source measurement alert strategy is set to On Alert Continue and the
source measurement has an alert, the pulse output follows the source
measurement and could go up to, but will not exceed, 125% of the selected
output.
Configure Pulse Output, Frequency mode from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse
menu selection (local display) or the Device Setup > Detailed Setup >
Output Configuration > Pulse Output menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Configuration Menu Diagram, page 139 for
the menu on the local display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse
Output, Frequency Mode Configuration menu is not available for the Oil & Gas
personality; however the Pulse per Unit Factor parameter is available from the Oil &
Gas main menu (see Oil Gas Main Menu, page 148. See HART Communicator
MI 019-222 89
Table 50 - Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Parameters

Communicator
4 Pulse Pulse Mode Freq Pulse Mode: Select Freq or Frequency to configure the Pulse Output
to pulse frequency.
4MapFreq Frequency Map VolFlow Map Frequency: Select the measurement to which you want to map
the pulse output. Choose VolFlow, BVolFlow, MassFlow, Velocity, Vor
Freq, Density, FlwTmp, Heat Con, or Heat Flow.
4 LRV Frequency LRV 0 Lower Range Value: LRV should be 0, indicating a no flow condition.
4 URV Set Frequency URV 1000 Upper Range Value: Set the output frequency that corresponds to the
mapped measurement’s upper range value. Choose 10, 100, 1000,
10,000, or Custom..
4DefFrq Set Default Frequency 0.000 Hz Default Frequency: Set the offline default frequency end point. Values
are limited to 0 or ≥ 150% of the mapped measurement’s Upper Range
Value (URV).
4 Damp Damping None Damping: Select the damping factor. Choose 0 to 32 seconds.
2 Puls/U (Available for Pulse Frequency 4200 Pulse per Unit Factor: (Applies to Oil & Gas personality only) Enter
Oil & Gas personality Factor the number of pulse output signals that represent a single flow unit.
only. This parameter is
accessed from the 1
OilGas > 2 Puls/U
menu selection.)
Turning Off Pulse Mode

To turn pulse output off, navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 Output >3 Pulse > 4 Pulse menu
(local display) or the Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Output Configuration >
Pulse Output > Pulse Mode menu (HART Communicator), and select None.
Pulse Output Status

Pulse Output Status describes the validity of the pulse output value at a particular
point in time. In order of least to most severe, a pulse output status can be:
• OK
• ALERT
• BAD
When the flowmeter is in Pulse mode, the pulse status is “sticky,” meaning that the
status will persist even if the condition causing the alert condition has cleared.
For example, you may see B:>HardU, which means that the mapped source’s value
has reached its configured hard upper limit since last clearing the pulse output. You
must explicitly clear the pulse output total value for its status to change. Generally,
pulse output inherits the status of its mapped flow measurement, with a few
exceptions. First, if a flow measurement mapped to the pulse output has an OUT OF
SERVICE status, the pulse output status will be BAD. Additionally, pulse output may
set its status to a higher severity than that of the mapped flow measurement based on
operation. Like pulse values, pulse status persists across the flowmeter power cycle.
Configuring the Home Screen

The following measurements can be configured to appear on the home screen:
• FlwVol: Volume flow
• FlwBVo: Base volume flow
• FlwMas: Mass flow
90 MI 019-222
• Velcty: Velocity
• Total1: Totalizer 1 reading
• Densty: Density
• Visc: Viscosity
• Press: Pressure
• FlwTmp: Process Temperature
• mA Out: Milliamp Output
• PulFrq: Pulse Output frequency (in Frequency mode) or Pulse Output total value
(in Pulse mode)
• Raw: Raw Vortex Count
• Heat Content: HtCon
• Heat Flow: HtFlow
NOTE: You cannot change totalizer display formats while the totalizer is
accumulating values.
Choose whether each measurement will be displayed (On) or hidden (Off). On the
local display, you also select the display format for each measurement that is turned
on. The following are display formats for most measurements:
AutoFormat XXXXX.XX XX.XXXXX

XXXXXXXX XXXX.XXX X.XXXXX
XXXXXX.X XXX.XXXX XXXXeXXX
If you select AutoFormat, the flowmeter selects the most appropriate display format
based on the measurement’s upper range value.
Configure the home screen from the 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3Display menu selection
(local display) or the Detailed Setup > Output Configuration > Local Display menu
selection (HART Communicator).
See the Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page 140 for the menus on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities, see the Output Menus - Display
Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2), page 154 for the menus on the local display for
the Oil & Gas personality, and see HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the
MI 019-222 91
Table 51 - Home Screen Parameters

Communicator
4CfgShow > 5 Select Show FlwVol: Show Measurements: Select the measurements to be shown on the
On/AutoFmt display. Specify whether each measurement should be displayed
4 CfgShow > 5 Select (turned on) or not display (turned off). For the local display only, specify
> 6 Show The remaining the display format for each measurement that is turned on.
measurements
4 CfgShow > 5 Select are set to Off/
> 6 Format AutoFmt:
FlwBvo, FlwMas,
Velcty, Tot1,
Tot2, Tot3,
Densty, Visc,
Press, FlwTmp,
mAOut, PulFrq,
Raw, HtCon,
HtFlow
4Show1st Primary Display FlwVol Show First: Select the measurement that will appear first when the
measurements are automatically or manually scanned on the display.
Only the Show Measurements parameters that have been turned On

are displayed and available for selection.
4 Cycle Display Cycle Manual Display Cycle: Specify whether the list of measurements configured
will be scanned automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual).
For example, if you specify that Total1 should be shown first and you set
the Display Cycle to Manual, the Totalizer 1 reading appears first and
you can manually cycle through the other configured measurement
parameters.
Setting Piping Parameters

Configure piping from the 1 Setup > 2 Pipe menu selection (local display) or the
Detailed Setup > Pipe menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram, page 143 for the menu on the local display
for the General and Steam personalities, see the Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram,
page 155 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality, and see the
HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART Communicator.
92 MI 019-222
Table 52 - Piping Parameters
Local Display HART Communicator Factory Default Description
3 Piping > 4 Config Piping > Piping Straight Upstream Piping Configuration: Select the upstream
Configuration piping configuration from the following:
• Straight
• 1 EL PAR (1 elbow with shedder parallel to elbow
plane)
• 1 EL PER (1 elbow with shedder perpendicular to
elbow plane)
• 2L0PDPAR (2 elbows with shedder parallel to plane of
closest elbow and distance between elbows is zero
pipe diameters)
• 2L0PDPER (2 elbows with shedder perpendicular to
plane of closest elbow and distance between elbows is
zero pipe diameters)
• 2L5PDPAR (2 elbows with shedder parallel to plane of
closest elbow and distance between elbows is 5 pipe
diameters)
• 2L5PDPER (2 elbows with shedder perpendicular to
plane of closest elbow and distance between elbows is
5 pipe diameters)
• Reducer
See Piping Configurations, page 94.
3 Piping > 4 UpDist Piping > Upstream 0 Upstream Distance: Enter the distance to the first upstream
Distance flow disturbance in pipe diameters.
3BoreSch Bore Schedule Sched 40 Bore Schedule: Select the pipe bore. Choose from
Sched 10, Sched 40 Sched 80, PN16, PN40, PN64, PN100,
or Sanitary.
3 Custom Custom K Reference Bias 0 Custom Kref Bias: Input the Kref Bias in percent (%). For
example, to change Kref by 2%, enter 2.0000.
MI 019-222 93
Figure 37 - Piping Configurations
1 EL PAR 1 EL PER
FLOW
DIRECTION FLOW
DIRECTION
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
FROM ELBOW
FROM ELBOW
2 L0 PD PAR 2 L0 PD PER
2 L5 PD PAR 2 L5 PD PER
FLOW
X DIRECTION
SEPERATION DISTANCE
FLOW BETWEEN ELBOWS FROM ELBOW
SEPERATION X DIRECTION
BETWEEN 2 L0 PD PER X=0 PD
DISTANCE
ELBOWS 2 L5 PD PER X=5 PD
FROM ELBOW
2 L0 PD PAR X=0 PD
2 L5 PD PAR X=5 PD
REDUCER
Setting Flowtube Parameters

Configure flowtube parameters such as model code, serial number, and the K Factor
from the 1 Setup > 2 NewMod menu selection (local display) or the Detailed Setup >
New Tube menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram, page 144 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities, see the NewMod Configuration
Menu Diagram, page 156 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas
personality, and see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the
HART Communicator.
94 MI 019-222
Table 53 - Flowmeter Parameters

Communicator
3 Model Model Code N/A Model Code: Enter the model code of the flowtube as found on the
flowmeter tag. If the flowtube and electronics were shipped as a unit,
the model code was preconfigured.
NOTE: When entering the Model Code, do not select a space
character as it will truncate the entered string and process the
model code entry incorrectly.
3 Ref No Reference Number 123456789abc- Reference Number: Enter the reference number (serial number) of the
defg flowtube (16 characters maximum) as found on the flowmeter tag. The
reference number was preconfigured if the flowtube and electronics
were shipped as a unit.
Update the reference number only if you have modified the flowmeter
model code. Do not change the model code or the reference number if
the transmitter was shipped with the flowtube as a unit.
3 K Ref > 4 K EGU K Reference > K p/ft3 K Reference Units: Select the unit for the reference K-factor. See
Corrected Units Units, page 16.
3 K Ref > 4 K Ref K Reference > K 258 Reference K Factor: Enter the reference K-factor as found on the
Reference flowmeter tag.
Setting Advanced Options

Configure advanced options from the 1 Setup > 2 Advance menu selection (local
display) or the Detailed Setup > Advance menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Advanced Options Menu Diagram, page 144 for the menu on local display for
the General and Steam personalities, see the Advanced Options Menu Diagram,
Table 54 - Advanced Option Parameters

Communicator
3 Per Sel Personality General Personality: Select the personality to be used for this application.
Choose from General, Steam, or Oil & Gas.
NOTE: When you change from one personality to another,
many configuration parameters are automatically set to default
values.
NOTE: Pulse must be turned off before changing the
personality.
3AdvOpts33 N/A N/A Advanced Options: The selections provide a additional options for
configuring custom flowtubes. Contact Global Customer Support
for information and assistance.
33. This menu is reserved for advanced options.
MI 019-222 95
Table 54 - Advanced Option Parameters (Continued)

Communicator
3SetMode N/A Normal Menu Mode: Select the menu mode to be used. Select Normal
(the default), ViewOnly, or ShowAll.
• Normal: Only the appropriate configuration-specific menu
items are visible in the menu system. For example, because
the mA output is set to a fixed value for low power vortex
flowmeters, the mA Output does not appear when you view
the menu in Normal mode.
• ViewOnly: Like Normal mode, only the appropriate
configuration-specific menu items are visible in the menu
system. In this mode, the menu system is read-only. With the
exception of changing the menu mode, you cannot make any
changes to the flowmeter’s configuration or operating
parameters.
• ShowAll: All menu entries, regardless of whether they apply
to the current configuration, are shown in the menu system.
Only safety limits are applied to lists and enterable fields;
otherwise, all options are shown in the menu system.
3NoiseRd Noise Reduction Method1 Noise Reduction Method: The flowmeter provides noise
Behavior reduction methods which can be applied to the Raw Vortex
frequency measurement in noisy environments. Select either
Method1 or Basic:
• Method1: Default behavior. If the Raw Vortex frequency
exceeds its Soft Limit, the reported frequency is clamped
when it reaches a value slightly above the Soft Limit value.
The Raw Vortex frequency status is set to W:>SoftU,
indicating it has exceeded its Soft Limit, and the VolumeFlow,
MassFlow, and BaseVolumeFlow Rates will be calculated
using the reported Raw Vortex frequency based on the Flow
damping setting.
The status of all Flow Rates is set according to the selected
AlertSt (see the Alert Strategy parameter in Measurement
Properties, page 68).
• Basic: Selects the behavior of the previous models, 84 Style
A and Style B. When the measured VolumeFlow, MassFlow,
or BaseVolumeFlow Rate exceeds its Hard Limit, Flow
damping is bypassed and the reported Rate is set to the
corresponding Hard Limit value. Totalization and Pulse
Output then follow the Reported Rate value. The status of all
Flow Rates is set according to the selected AlertSt (see the
Alert Strategy parameter in Measurement Properties, page
68). This should only be used if you desire an immediate
indication via a full scale Rate value being reported, when an
undamped rate measurement exceeds its Hard Limit, even
momentarily.
Resetting the Database

To reset the flowmeter to its factory default values:
1. Navigate to the 1 Setup > 2 SetDef menu selection (local display) or the
Detailed Setup > Advance menu selection (HART Communicator).
See the Resetting the Database Menu Diagram, page 144 for the menu on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities, see the Oil Gas Main
Menu, page 148 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas personality, or
see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the HART
Communicator.
2. When prompted to reset to the factory defaults, choose Yes.
3. The message DONE displays.
4. Save the configuration changes.
96 MI 019-222
Calibration and Test

The following Calibration and Test functions can be performed on the flowmeter.
• Set the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI)
• Calibrate the 4 and 20 mA output
• Calibrate the process temperature (if the flowmeter has an optional temperature
sensor, RTD)
• Clear the Time in Service meter
• Use the flowmeter to test the loop
• Use the flowmeter to test the pulse output
See the Calibration/Test Menu Diagram, page 145 for the menu on the local display
for the General and Steam personalities, see the Calibration/Test Menu Diagram,
Calibration
You can set the automatic LFCI, calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA outputs, and calibrate
the process temperature (if your flowmeter has an optional temperature sensor) from
Calibration.
Automatic LFCI Selection

The flowmeter’s Auto-LFCI function automatically sets the Low Flow Cut-In threshold
to reject ambient no-flow noise conditions; the flowmeter chooses the lowest level at
which no signal is detected over a fixed time interval.
NOTE: The Auto-LFCI function is NOT a dynamically adjusting value.
This one-time function “watches” a zero-flow condition and determines the best LFCI
setting. The zero flow is based on seeing a nonzero reported vortex frequency. The
flowmeter uses this LFCI setting until you change it manually or run the Auto-LFCI
function again.
If the LFCI gets to the largest LFCI value and still detects a vortex frequency, the Auto-
LFCI function reports it. It does not change the LFCI setting. In this case, you can set
the LFCI manually.
The flow must be zero during this procedure.
NOTE: This procedure may confirm your choice of LFCI setting in Setting Tuning
Parameters, page 76. However, if it selects a different value, it overwrites your
selection unless you cancel the changes.
1. Set the process flow to zero.
2. Select 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3CalLFCI (local display) or Diag/Service >
Auto LFCI (HART Communicator).
The flowmeter starts testing the most sensitive LFCI setting. If a false flow signal
is detected within a fixed time period, the LFCI is increased to the next level. This
process continues until a level is reached where the flowmeter does not detect
any false flow signals. While the function is executing, Busy and the maximum
time remaining appear on the display.
When complete, the new LFCI setting appears on the display.
MI 019-222 97
Calibrating the 4 mA and 20 mA Outputs

The flowmeter has been accurately calibrated at the factory. Recalibration of the
output is normally not required, unless it is being adjusted to match the calibration of
the receiving device.
In addition, you cannot perform this procedure on low power Vortex flowmeters or on
standard flowmeters where the Loop Current Mode is disabled. In both cases, the mA
output is set at a fixed value: 10 mA for low power flowmeters and 3.8 mA for
flowmeters with Loop Current Mode disabled.
To calibrate the flowmeter’s 4 and 20 mA outputs, perform the following steps:
1. Set the flow to zero.
2. Select to calibrate the 4 to 20 mA output by selecting 1 Setup > 2 Calib >
3 Cal mA (local display) or Diag/Service > Calibration (HART Communicator).
a. Select 4Restore (local display) or Restore mA Calibration (HART
Communicator) to restore the factory calibration.
b. Select 4Cal 4mA and 4Cal20mA (local display) or D/A Trim or
Scaled D/A Trim (HART Communicator) to allow the 4 to 20 mA output of
the flowmeter to be calibrated or matched to the calibration of the receiving
device to an accuracy of 0.005 mA.
c. Select 4CalDate (local display) or Calibration Date (HART Communicator)
and enter the date of the last calibration, if desired.
d. Select 4Initial (local display) and enter the initials of the person who
performed the last calibration, if desired. 4Initial is not available on the
HART Communicator.
Calibrating the Temperature Sensor

If your flowmeter has an optional temperature sensor (RTD), you can calibrate the
temperature sensor or restore the sensor’s factory calibration. Calibration of the
temperature sensor is normally not required. This calibration procedure adds an offset
to match another device.
To calibrate the temperature sensor:
1. Navigate to the 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3 CalRtd > 4CalUser (local display) or
Diag/Service > RTD Calibration (HART Communicator).
2. Select 5RtdEgu (local display), or follow the prompts on the screen (HART
Communicator). Note the engineering units used by the temperature sensor.
3. Select 5CurTmp (local display), or follow the prompts on the screen (HART
Communicator). Enter the current temperature in the selected engineering units.
4. Save your changes.
Restoring the Temperature Sensor Factory Settings

To restore the temperature sensor’s factory calibration settings:
1. Select 1Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3 CalRtd > 4Restore (local display) or Diag/Service
> RTD Calibration > Restore RTD Calibration (HART Communicator).
The message Applying appears on the display.
98 MI 019-222
Clearing the Time in Service Meter

The flowmeter has a Time in Service meter which tracks the number of days that the
flowmeter has been in service. The Clear Time in Service function allows you to clear
the User-Managed Time in Service meter that reports the number of days the
flowmeter has been in service since the last reset.
To reset the Time in Service meter:
1. Navigate to 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Calib > 3ClrSrvT and select ENTER.
2. At the Clr Now? prompt, select ENTER.
3. When the Time in Service meter has been reset, a DONE prompt displays.
Test
In Test mode, you can self test the flowmeter or use the flowmeter to test the loop.
Testing the Loop

The flowmeter can be used as a signal source to check and/or calibrate other
instruments in the control loop, such as indicators, controllers, and recorders. To do
this, set the mA output, frequency pulse output, or digital output signals to any value
within the range limits of the meter.
NOTE: You cannot set the mA output with Low Power flowmeters or if Loop
Current Mode is disabled.
To test the loop:
1. Navigate to 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Test (local display) or DIag/Service > Loop Test
(HART Communicator) and select the calibration source:
• Analog output: 3 Set mA (local display) or Set Analog Out (HART
Communicator)
• Frequency pulse output (applies to Pulse Frequency Mode): 3 Set Hz (local
display) or Set Pulse Out (HART Communicator)
• Digital output 3 Set DIG (local display) or Set Digital Out (HART
Communicator)
Set the selected signal to any value within the range limits of the meter.
Testing the Flowmeter

The self test checks the flowmeter operation by injecting, near the front end of the
electronics, an internally generated periodic signal of known frequency. The frequency
of this signal is in turn measured and checked against the injected signal.
During the self test, the status of measurements will be set to Offline. In addition,
totalizer values will not be updated, but totalizer status will indicate that the totalizer
has not been running for a period of time.
To run a self-test:
1. Select 1 Cal/Tst > 2 Test > 3SelfTst (local display) or Diag/Service > Self Test
(HART Communicator).
Pulse output continues during a self-test operation, but the output does not
2. Clear the totalizers after the self test. Refer to Totalizer Actions, page 100 for
instructions.
MI 019-222 99
Pulse Actions
If Pulse Output is configured for Pulse mode, the number of pulse signals that the
flowmeter transmits up to the current point in time represents the total flow value up to
that point, where individual pulse signals represent a user-specified amount of the
total flow value.
You can control how the flowmeter starts and stops the accumulation of the total flow
value.
When in Pulse mode, Pulse Output can be in one of two states:
• ON: The flowmeter is actively accumulating values and transmitting pulse signals.
• OFF: The flowmeter is not actively accumulating values or transmitting pulse
signals, and any previously collected values may or may not have been cleared.
For information on the flowmeter’s pulse output and how to configure pulse output,
refer to Configuring Pulse Output, page 85.
When Pulse Output is set to Pulse mode, you can turn pulse accumulation on, turn
pulse accumulation off, clear the pulse output totals collected up to the current point in
time, or resume collecting pulse outputs by selecting the following options:
• On: This option clears existing pulse totals and the flowmeter starts transmitting
and accumulating pulse signals. This option can be selected only if pulse output
is off.
• Resume: Without clearing the existing pulse totals, the flowmeter starts
transmitting and accumulating pulse signals. This option can be selected only if
pulse output is off.
• Clear: If pulse output accumulation is off, this option clears existing pulse totals.
You cannot clear existing pulse output totals while the flowmeter is accumulating
values.
• Off: The flowmeter stops transmitting and accumulating pulse signals. The
existing pulse totals are saved up to the current point. This option can be selected
only if pulse output is on.
To turn the pulse output accumulation on, turn pulse output accumulation off, clear the
pulse output accumulation, or resume collecting pulse output totals, complete the
steps below.
See the Pulse Actions Top Level Menu Diagram, page 141 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities. The Pulse Actions Top Level menu is
not available for the Oil & Gas personality. See the HART Communicator Menus, page
162 for the menus on the HART Communicator.
1. On the local display, press ENTER to stop the display of measurements and
select ENTER at the 1 Pulse menu. On the HART Communicator, select
Diag/Service > Totalizers > Pulse Operation.
2. Select On, Off, Resume, or Clear.
3. Save the selection.
Totalizer Actions
The flowmeter provides three separate totalizers that accumulate flow measurements
to keep track of amounts of flow. (If you are using the Oil & Gas personality, there is
only a single totalizer.) Each of the totalizers can be mapped independently to keep
track of different flow measurements.
You can control how the flowmeter starts and stops accumulation of the total flow
value. For information on the flowmeter’s totalizer capabilities and how to configure
totalizers, refer to Setting Totalizer Parameters, page 79.
100 MI 019-222
Each totalizer can be in one of two states:

• ON: The totalizer is actively accumulating flow values.
• OFF: The totalizer is not actively accumulating flow values, and any previously
collected totalizer values may or may not have been cleared.
You can turn totalizers on, turn totalizers off, clear the totalizers, or resume
accumulation by selecting the following options:
• On: This option clears existing totals and the flowmeter starts totalizer
accumulation. This option can only be selected if the totalizer is off.
• Resume: Without clearing the existing totals, the flowmeter starts totalizer
accumulation. This option can be selected only if the totalizer is off.
• Clear: If accumulation is off, this option clears existing totals. You cannot clear
existing totals while the flowmeter is accumulating values.
• Off: The flowmeter stops totalizer accumulation. The existing totals are saved up
to the current point. This option can be selected only if the totalizer is on.
To turn the pulse output accumulation on, turn pulse output accumulation off, clear the
pulse output accumulation, or resume collecting pulse output totals, complete the
steps below.
See the Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram, page 142 for the menu on the
local display for the General and Steam personalities, see the Totalizer Actions Top
Level Menu Diagram, page 158 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas
personality, or see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on the
HART Communicator.
1. On the local display, press ENTER to stop the display of measurements and
select ENTER at the 1 Totx menu selection (x can be 1, 2, or 3). On the HART
Communicator, select Diag/Service > Totalizers > Totalizer x Operation (x can
be defined as 1, 2, or 3.)
2. If prompted, enter the Lo password (local display only).
3. Select On, Off, Clear, or Resume.
4. Save the selection.
Messages
These tables define the most common operation, configuration, and status messages,
and the actions needed to address them.
Some messages may appear periodically with a valid flow measurement. This
typically occurs when soft limits are exceeded; the messages mean that a hard limit is
approaching.
Operational Messages
Table 55 - Operational Messages
Message Explanation Corrective Action

Override The flowmeter is being overridden by an external host, None; this is a notification that the flowmeter is being
such as another configurator or control system. overridden.
W: Input Alert: An input to a specific measurement or calculation Make sure configured flowing temperature is within the
has exceeded the normal limit and is in the soft limit temperature limits of the sensor.
region.
Check the raw frequency to determine if it is out of limits for the
B: Input Bad Input: An input to a specific measurement or flowmeter size.
calculation has exceeded the soft limit. This adversely
affects all measurements.
MI 019-222 101
Table 55 - Operational Messages (Continued)

W: Offln Alert: The transmitter goes offline when a totalizer is When the transmitter enters an offline state, any running
running. totalizers are turned off, and this message is generated.
Resume, or turn the totalizer(s) back on using the Totalizer

Actions menu (see Totalizer Actions, page 100.
Boot App The firmware is corrupted. This may be due to an Contact Global Customer Support.
incomplete firmware upgrade through special hardware
supplied to the user.
Boot CMD The unit has been commanded to stay in boot mode.
Configuration Messages
Table 56 - Configuration Messages
WrProtct The write protect jumper is missing or is You cannot change the configuration unless the jumper is in the WRITE
in the PROTECT position. position. Install or move the write protect jumper to the WRITE position. See
Setting the Write Protect Jumper, page 52.
Cfg Err An incorrect model code was entered. Enter the correct model code as it appears on the flowmeter’s data plate.
MsCode
Bad URV The entered URV has exceeded the Press Enter to change the URV to the value of the URL. Verify that the
URV=URL URL (meter capacity) of the flowmeter. entered value for Flowing Density is correct.
Bad URV The entered URV is less than the Press Enter to change the URV to the minimum value allowed. Verify that the
URV=Min minimum value allowed for the URV. LFCI setting and the value for Flowing Density is correct.
The minimum URV is three times the LFCI flow rate. For applications where
the URV is very low relative to the flowmeter’s capacity, this error message
may appear when this constraint is violated. This can be the result of lowering
the URV, increasing the LFCI setting, or decreasing the Flowing Density
(increasing the corresponding LFCI flow rate values).
FcErr E:0x#### An internal function did not execute If this message occurs at startup, an invalid configuration exists. Recheck the
successfully. configuration.
If this message occurs during setup, review the inputs associated with the last
menu function.
If these steps do not resolve the problem, re-enter the model code.
Status Messages
The following tables describe four types of status messages:
• Informational messages indicate that the measurement is operating within
normally expected limits.
• Alert status (W:) messages indicate that the measurement is operating outside
the normally expected limits, but not outside the hard limits. An alert message is
also generated if a measurement is configured to continue when encountering a
bad value (that is, AlertSt is set to NoAlert).
• BAD status (B:) messages indicate that the measurement is outside the hard
limits, and the mA output is set to the failure status.
• Out-of-Service status (O:) messages usually mean that the measurement is not
supported by the available hardware.
102 MI 019-222
Table 57 - Informational Status Messages
Message Description
Ok All inputs and calculations are okay.
InputFxd An input is fixed. Other input is live.
Paused A measurement is frozen.

Override A measurement has been overridden.
IsDeflt A measurement is always using default.
Table 58 - Alert Status Messages
Message Description
W:<SoftL Outside lower soft limit. Value not clamped.
W:>SoftU Outside upper soft limit. Value not clamped.
W:Input An input has an alert status.
W:RtdSht RTD is shorted.

W:RtdOpn RTD is open.
Table 59 - Bad Status Messages
Message Description
B:<HardL Outside lower hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:>HardU Outside upper hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:Input An input has a BAD status.
B:NotRdy Measurement is not ready.
B:iNoRdy An input is not ready.
B:iUsrOf An input is turned off by the user.
B:iFacOf An input is turned off by the factory.
B:IntBad Measurement has an internal bad value.

B:RtdSht RTD is shorted.
B:RtdOpn RTD is open.
B:OvrHL Override is outside the hard limit. Value is clamped.
B:OvrSL Override outside soft limit. Value not clamped.
Table 60 - Out-of-Service Status Messages
Message Description
O:UsrOff Measurement was turned off by the user. This message may appear when changing the
model code, for example. If the hardware is supported, update the model code to put a
measurement in service.
O:FacOff Measurement is turned off because measurement hardware is not available.
MI 019-222 103
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Using the Local Display
Using the Local Display

This chapter describes how to operate the flowmeter using the optional local display. It
also provides menu diagrams that are available on the local display.
Local Display and Home Screen

An optional local display provides real-time measurement information, function status,
and reference information. With four multi-function keys, the display also provides a
means of performing device configuration, calibration, and self-test, along with
Totalizer and Pulse actions.
During normal operation, the flowmeter displays a selected measurement value, the
name and engineering units of the measurement currently being displayed, and other
status and diagnostic information specific to the selected measurement on the home
screen (shown in Local Display and Home Screen, page 104). You can configure one
or more measurements appropriate for your application to appear on the home
screen, and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the selected
measurements’ values.
The home screen is fully configurable. Depending on your application and the
flowmeter’s model code, you can customize the home screen to manually or
automatically cycle among one or more flowmeter measurements including: volume
flow, mass flow, velocity, density, viscosity, pressure, process temperature, mA output,
pulse output, raw vortex count, heat content, heat flow, or any of the totalizer readings.
The home screen also displays rollover counters for totalizer readings and any alerts
that exist have been generated.
Figure 38 - Local Display and Home Screen

Name of measurement Engineering units (EGUs)
currently being displayed of measurement currently
BACK being displayed
Total1 gal
ESC
Four multi-function keys

(ESC, BACK, ENTER, NEXT)
to navigate through the
999999.9 ENTER
Measurement value
menu system
RO 00 Paused
Rollover counter
indicator and value Status of measurement
(appears only for totalizers) currently being displayed
NEXT
Flowmeter configuration and operation is accomplished with the four multi-function

keys:
104 MI 019-222
Using the Local Display Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Key Function
Left Arrow (ESC) • Moves left in the menu structure

• Moves the cursor to the left in a data entry field
• Escapes from changes in a pick list menu or data entry34
• Answers No to prompts
Right Arrow (ENTER) • Moves right in the menu structure

• Used to access the data entry edit mode of a parameter
• Moves the cursor to the right in a data entry field
• Enters the changed menu pick list choices or data entry34
• Answers Yes to prompts (for example, Save ->)
• Allows you to view information containing too many characters to appear
on the display. For example, use ENTER when checking fluid parameter
values to view all digits of the values.
Up Arrow (BACK) • Moves upward in the menu structure, a pick list menu, or list of
characters
Down Arrow (NEXT) • Moves downward in the menu structure, a pick list menu, or list of
characters
Measurement
During normal operation, the real-time flowmeter measurements that you specify
during flowmeter configuration display. By default, the volumetric flow rate appears on
the display, and you can also view the list of all the other configured values.
The values displayed are fully configurable.
If the display is configured for a Manual cycle, a user-configured measurement
appears on the display, and you can manually scroll through the other configured
measurements manually. If configured for an Auto cycle, the display cycles through
the measurements you specified during flowmeter configuration automatically.
For additional information on configuring the measurement display, see Configuring
the Home Screen, page 90.
Using the Flowmeter Software

Using Passwords
Viewing the flowmeter’s operation and configuration data does not require that you
enter a password. However, the flowmeter has a two-level password system that can
restrict access to specific flowmeter functions during online and offline local
configuration.
• The Hi password is an administrator password that controls access to all
flowmeter functions such as configuring, calibrating, and testing the flowmeter.
• The Lo password controls access to starting, stopping, resuming, and clearing
totalizers, and also switching between the menu modes (View Only, Normal or
Show All).
Once you enter the appropriate password, the menu system “remembers” the
password until you exit the menu session, that is when the display returns to showing
measurements.
Both Hi and Lo passwords are 4-character alphanumeric strings.
34. On data entry, repeatedly press the key until the cursor reaches the end of the display.
MI 019-222 105
NOTE:
• If you want to use the Lo password, a non-blank Hi password must also be
configured. The Lo password has no effect if the Hi password is not
configured or is blank (set to 4 spaces)
• The flowmeter is shipped from the factory with blank passwords. This allows
access to all flowmeter functions. If password protection is required, configure
the Hi password from the 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd menu selection
first, and then configure a Lo password from 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 LoPwd
menu selection, if required.
• If you lose your password, contact Global Customer Support for assistance.
When navigating to a function that requires a password, perform the following steps:
1. The prompt HiPswd? or LoPswd? appears on the display if the function requires
a Hi or Lo password, respectively. Press ENTER at the prompt.
2. Two brackets surrounding four spaces appear on the display with a flashing
cursor positioned at the first character.
3. Use the up and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT) to scroll through the list of
acceptable characters.
4. Select the desired character and press the right arrow key (ENTER) to move to
the next character.
5. Continue this process until the password is complete, and then press the right
arrow key (ENTER) to move the flashing cursor to the right bracket.
6. Press ENTER to complete entering the password. If you need to modify an
incorrect character, use the left (ESC) and right (ENTER) arrow keys to move
back and forth.
After passwords have been configured, if you enter an incorrect password when
prompted for one, the display indicates Sorry Error, and then redisplays the
password prompt to allow you to enter the correct password. If you exit out of the
prompt by pressing the left arrow key (ESC) without entering a password, the menu
system displays 2Rd Only and is set to Read Only mode.
Turning On Password Restrictions

To turn on password restrictions:
1. Set the Hi (Admin) password first:
a. Go to 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd and press ENTER. See the Password
Configuration Menu Diagram, page 145 for the menu on the local display for
the General and Steam personalities, see the Password Configuration Menu
Diagram, page 156 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas
personality, and see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the
b. Enter four alphanumeric characters for the Hi password using the arrow keys
and then press ENTER.
NOTE: You must configure the HiPwd before configuring the LoPwd.
2. Set the Lo (User) password:
a. Navigate to 1 Setup > 2 Passwd > 3 LoPwd and press ENTER.
b. Enter four alphanumeric characters for the Lo password using the arrow keys
and then press ENTER.
3. Save your configuration changes and exit to the Home screen for the passwords
to take effect.
106 MI 019-222
Turning Off Password Restrictions

To turn off password restrictions:
1. Go to 1 Setup and enter the Hi password at the HiPwd? prompt. See the
Password Configuration Menu Diagram, page 145 for the menu on the local
display for the General and Steam personalities, see the Password Configuration
Menu Diagram, page 156 for the menu on the local display for the Oil & Gas
personality, and see the HART Communicator Menus, page 162 for the menus on
the HART Communicator.
2. Navigate to 2 Passwd > 3 HiPwd and press ENTER.
3. Enter four blanks (spaces) for the Hi password using the arrow keys and then
press ENTER.
4. Navigate to 3 LoPwd and press ENTER.
5. Enter four blanks (spaces) for the Lo password using the arrow keys and then
press ENTER.
6. Save your configuration changes and exit to the Home screen for the password
configuration changes.
Totalizer Access Restrictions

You can control access to totalizer configuration and data by configuring passwords.
Such safeguards are important when using totalizers for custody transfer applications,
where the total flow of a material from one place to another needs to be carefully and
accurately tracked, or to prevent unintentional or malicious changes to configuration
and data.
The table describes access restrictions for various totalizer operations. Although there
are exceptions as noted in the table below, generally, the Lo (User) password restricts
the ability to start, stop, or resume accumulating totals and clear existing totals, and
the Hi (Admin) password restricts access to the Setup menu, which contains the
options for changing engineering units and mapping.
Table 61 - Totalizer Access Restrictions
Access Restriction for Totalizer Actions

Totalizer 1 Operations Totalizer 2 Operations Totalizer 3 Operations
Start Start Start

Hi and Lo Resume Resume Resume
Write Passwords Stop Change Units Stop Change Units Stop Change Units
Protection Configured Clear or Mapping Clear or Mapping Clear or Mapping
Off No Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted Not restricted
On Both Read only Read only Lo (User) Read only Not restricted Read only
Off Both Lo (User) Hi (Admin) Lo (User) Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin)
Off Hi only Not restricted Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin) Not restricted Hi (Admin)
NOTE: To use the Lo (User) password, you must also have a Hi (Admin)
password configured.
For information on configuring passwords, refer to Using Passwords, page 105.
Calibration/Test Access Restrictions

Access to the Calibration/Test menu can be restricted with passwords.
MI 019-222 107
If passwords are configured, you may need to enter the Hi password to perform the
functions available from the Calibration/Test menu.
Activating an Edit, Pick List, or User Menu Block

To open a menu block that allows you to edit or select data or to perform a function,
move to the menu block and press the right arrow (ENTER) key.
Editing Numbers and Strings

You can edit any number or string in the menu system the same way that you would
enter a password. The up and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT) scroll through a
list of acceptable characters for the current position. The right arrow key (ENTER)
moves the cursor to the right. It also accepts the change at the end. The left arrow key
(ESC) moves the cursor to the left. It also cancels the change at the beginning.
There are three kinds of items you can edit: signed numbers, unsigned numbers, and
strings.
Signed Number
Signed numbers always have a + or - sign at the beginning. The + can only be
changed to -, and vice versa.
Unsigned Number
For unsigned numbers, cycle through the digits 0-9, and the decimal point, with the up
and down arrow keys (BACK and NEXT). When you enter a decimal point in any
position, and there is already a decimal point, the new decimal point overrides the old
one.
Strings
Characters in strings can be changed to any character provided in the pick list. You
can sequence through the list of characters by pressing the up or down arrow keys
(BACK or NEXT). To enter the change, you must still press ENTER from the right side
of the data field, after scrolling to the right side with the right arrow key (ENTER).
Picking from a List

Pick list items allow you to choose a selection from a flowmeter-supplied list of
choices. Go to the applicable parameter, and press ENTER. The entire bottom line of
the display flashes. If you press the up or down arrow keys (BACK or NEXT), the
display shows the previous or next choice respectively from its list. Pressing ENTER
accepts the change; pressing ESC returns the previous selection.
108 MI 019-222
Accessing the Menu System from the Home Screen

From the Home screen, you can access the flowmeter’s main menu and the Pulse
and Totalizer action menus ss shown in Accessing the Top Level Menus from the
Home Screen, page 109.
Figure 39 - Accessing the Top Level Menus from the Home Screen
Measurement n (optional)
Press ESC on the Home screen to ...
ESC
go to the Main Menu, then use the up Measurement 1
and down arrows (BACK and NEXT)
to scroll through the choices Press ENTER on the Home screen to go
in the menu:
- 1Measure (see Measure Mode)
999.9999 ENTER
to the Total/Pulse Actions menu, then use
the up and down arrows (BACK and NEXT)
- 1 Status (see Status Mode) to scroll through the choices in the menu:
- 1 Setup (see Setup Mode - 1 Pulse (see Pulse Actions) (a)
- 1Cal/Tst (see Calibration/Test Mode) - 1 Tot1 (see Totalizer Actions)
- 1 Tot2 (see Totalizer Actions)
- 1 Tot3 (see Totalizer Actions)
(a) The Pulse Actions menu appears only when pulse output is in Pulse mode.
Configuration Example
This example demonstrates how to achieve a 4 to 20 mA analog output for Mass
Flow, a pulse output for Mass Flow, and how to display Total Mass.
The example includes the following configuration steps performed using the local
keypad/display pushbuttons:
1. Configuring a User Fluid
2. Configuring 4 to 20 mA Analog Output for Mass Flow
3. Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow
4. Displaying Total Mass
Configuring a User Fluid

Configure the following parameters:
• Fluid Type (Fluid) = User Liquid
• Fluid Name (Name) = Example Liquid
• Reference density of the liquid (ThRefD) = 49.0172
• Reference Temperature (ThRefTD) = 75
• Δ Density/Δ Temperature (ThCoefD) = -0.034529561
For more information, see Updating Fluid Parameters, page 73.
MI 019-222 109
1. Select 1 Setup > 2 Fluid > 3 Flud as follows:

a. Press the left arrow (ESC) to access the main menu and use the down arrow
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
c. The Loop in Manual? prompt displays. This prompt reminds you that you
are going offline. If you are using the output of this meter for control, set your
control loop to manual, and then press ENTER in response to this prompt.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Press ENTER.
e. The 3 Fluid User Liquid menu displays. Press ENTER. The display blinks
with asterisks (*****).
f. Select the desired fluid type from the pick list using the up and down arrows,
then then press ENTER to lock-in your selection.
2. Press NEXT to select 3 Name. Enter the name (“Example Liquid”) by editing the
string. When done, press ENTER. You are asked to confirm your entry with the
Sure? prompt. Press ENTER.
3. Press NEXT to select 3 Config FlwTmp. Use the right arrow and the up and
down arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done,
press ENTER to return to 3 Config FlwTmp.
4. Press NEXT to select 3 BasTmp and enter the base temperature for Standard or
Normal Volume by editing the value. When done, press ENTER.
5. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Density. Use the right arrow and the up and
down arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done,
press ENTER to return to 3 Config Density.
6. Press NEXT to select 3 BasDen and enter the base density for Standard or
7. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Press. Use the right arrow and the up and down
arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done, press
ENTER to return to 3 Config Press.
8. Press NEXT to select 3 BasPres and enter the base pressure for Standard or
9. Press NEXT to select 3 Config Visc. Use the right arrow and the up and down
arrows to select and enter values for the EGU, LRV, and URV. When done, press
ENTER to return to 3 Config Visc.
10. Press NEXT to select 3 ThCoefD and enter the Thermal Coefficient Expansion
for Density (-0.034529561). When done, press ENTER.
11. Press NEXT to select 3 ThRefTD and enter the Thermal Reference Temperature
by editing the string (75). When done, press ENTER.
12. Press NEXT to select 3 ThRefD and enter the Thermal Reference Density
(49.0172). When done, press ENTER.
13. Set the ThCoefV, ThRefTV, and ThRefV using the same procedure as Steps 10,
11, and 12.
14. Press ESC to select 2 Fluid.
15. Press ESC to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
16. Press ENTER to save the configuration. You are asked to confirm your entries
with the SURE? prompt. Press ENTER to complete the configuration.
The user fluid is now fully configured.
110 MI 019-222
Configuring 4 to 20 mA Analog Output for Mass Flow

For details, see Configuring mA Output, page 85.
1. Select 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 mA as follows:
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
control loop to manual, then press ENTER in response to this prompt.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 2 Output. Press
ENTER.
e. The 3 Coms menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 3 mA. Press
ENTER.
2. The 4 Map VolFlow menus displays. Press ENTER and then use the down arrow
to select MassFlow. Press ENTER.
The remaining settings can use the default values.
3. Press ESC to display the 3 mA menu.
4. Press ESC to display 2 Output menu.
5. Press ESC to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
Configuring Pulse Output for Mass Flow

Configure the following parameters:
• 4 Pulse = Pulse
• 4 MapPul = MassFlow
• 4 PWidth = 0.500 ms
• 4 FacEGU = lb
• 4 FacU/P = 2.204633 lbs per pulses
• 4 FacP/U = no change (driven by FacU/P setting)
For details, see Configuring Pulse Output, Pulse Mode, page 86.
1. Select 1 Setup > 2 Output > 3 Pulse as follows:
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 2 Output. Press
ENTER.
e. The 3 Coms menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 3 Pulse. Press
ENTER.
MI 019-222 111
2. The 4 Pulse None menus displays. Press ENTER and then use the down arrow
to select Pulse. Press ENTER.
3. The 4 MapPul VolFlow menu displays. Use the down arrow to select MassFlow.
Press ENTER.
4. The 4 PWidth 0.500 ms displays. Press ENTER to modify that value, or press
the down arrow to use it as is.
5. The 4FacEGU lb menu displays. Press ENTER to modify that value, or press the
down arrow to use it as is.
6. The 4 FacU/P menu displays. Enter 2.204633. When done, press ENTER.
7. The 4 FacP/U menu displays. This setting is driven by the FacU/P setting. Press
the down arrow.
8. Press ESC to display the 3 Pulse menu.
9. Press ESC to display the 2 Output menu.
10. Press ESC again to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
Displaying Total Mass

First specify that Mass is displayed in one of the Totalizers (Tot1) and then turn on
Tot1.
For more information, see Configuring a Totalizer (T1, T2, or T3), page 81 and
Totalizer Actions, page 100.
1. To specify that Mass is displayed in Totalizer 1, select 1 Setup > 2 Total > 3 Tot1
as follows:
to select 1 Setup.
b. Press ENTER.
d. The 2 Fluid menu displays. Use the down arrow to select 2 Total. Press
ENTER.
e. The 3 Tot1 menu displays. Press ENTER.
2. The 4 Map Volume menu displays. Press ENTER.
3. Use the down arrow to select Mass. Press ENTER.
4. The 4 EGU lb menu displays. Select the desired EGU and press ENTER.
5. Press ESC to display the 3 Tot1 menu.
6. Press ESC to display the 2 Total menu.
7. Press ESC again to display <-CANCEL SAVE->.
9. To turn on Totalizer 1, press ENTER to display 1 Tot1 Off menu.
112 MI 019-222
10. Press ENTER. Use the down arrow to select On. Press ENTER.
The configuration is now complete.
Menus
The menus that are available on the local display depend on the personality that was
selected for the flowmeter. For more information on personalities, see Personalities,
page 64.
Menus for the General and Steam Personalities

Figure 40 - Status Menu Diagram
ENTER ENTER ENTER To/From

2MeaStat 3 Select Measurement
ESC ESC ESC Status Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NotProt
ESC
2 WrProt NEXT BACK
ESC
Prot
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 DiagEr
ESC
1 Status
NEXT BACK
2 Reason
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 SW Rev
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 Primary
ESC
2 Srv Tim NEXT BACK
ESC
3 User
ESC
MI 019-222 113
Figure 41 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram (1 of 2)

ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
Raw 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Velcty 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total1 NEXT BACK Densty 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK Visc 4 EGU
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total2 NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Press 4 EGU

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK 4 Value
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
Total3 NEXT BACK Reynld 4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK To/From KCor

on Measurement
4 More Status Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
114 MI 019-222
Figure 42 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From Reynld
on Totalizer Menu NEXT BACK
ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC
FlwVol 4 EGU
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
KCor 4 EGU
ESC
4 Value
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status
ESC FlwMas 4 EGU
mA Out NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status
ENTER
ESC 4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
PulFrq 4 EGU
ESC
FlwBVo (a) 4 EGU
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status ENTER
ESC 4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp 4 EGU
ESC
HtCon 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK
4 Status ENTER
ESC 4 Status
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
EleTemp 4 EGU
ESC
HtFlw 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
4 Value
ESC
NEXT BACK
(a) FlwBVo is not available in the Steam personality.
MI 019-222 115
Figure 43 - Setup Main Menu

ENTER ENTER
To/From
2 Fluid
Fluid Menus
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Tuning Tuning Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Total
ESC Totalizer Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Measure-
2 Measure ment Config Menus
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Output
2 Output
ESC Menus
ESC
1 Setup NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 Pipe Piping Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From
2 NewMod
ESC Flowtube Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Advanced
2Advance Options Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Resetting
2 SetDef
ESC Database Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Passwd
2 Passwd Config Menu
ESC ESC
116 MI 019-222
Figure 44 - Fluid Menu Diagram

ENTER
User Liquid (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
User Vapor (a)
ESC
3ThCoefD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 Fluid User Gas (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
3ThRefTD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
SaturatedSteam (b) NEXT BACK

ESC
3 ThRefD (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
SuperHeatedSteam (b) NEXT BACK

ESC
3ThCoefV (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 Name OPTIONAL NEXT BACK
3ThRefTV (c) TO EDIT VALUE

NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From FlwTmp
3 Config FlwTmp Config Menu NEXT BACK
ESC
3 ThRefV (c) TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
3 BasTmp TO EDIT VALUE
(a) User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas are only
NEXT BACK
ENTER available in the General personality.
To/From Densty (b) SaturatedSteam and SuperHeatedSteam are only
3 Config Densty Config Menu
ESC available in the Steam personality.
(c) These parameters only apply to configurable
NEXT BACK liquids available from the General personality and
only appear in the menu if a User Fluid is currently
3 BasDen TO EDIT VALUE selected:
- User Liquid
NEXT BACK - User Vapor, and
ENTER - User Gas.
To/From Pressure
3 Config Press Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 BasPrs TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Viscosity
3 Config Visc Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
MI 019-222 117
Figure 45 - Process Temperature (FlwTmp) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
4Default TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
3 Config FlwTmp ESC ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4
ESC
4CMethod NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
32
ESC
118 MI 019-222
Figure 46 - Density Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Config Densty
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4CMethod User On
ESC ESC
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
MI 019-222 119
Figure 47 - Pressure Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 URV TO EDIT VALUE
ESC ENTER
None
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
NoAlert
ESC 0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
3 Config Press ESC ESC
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
4 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER NEXT BACK
User Def
ESC 4
4CMethod ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
120 MI 019-222
Figure 48 - Viscosity Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
Fluids Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
4 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
4AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
3 Config Visc NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
NEXT BACK
4CMethod User On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC
MI 019-222 121
Figure 49 - Tuning Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
Off
ESC
3 RdCorr NEXT BACK
On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
4 FlwEGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
LFCI 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 Tuning LFCI 3
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 LFCI LFCI 4
ESC ESC
4Setting NEXT BACK

ESC
LFCI 5
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 6
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 7
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 8
ESC
122 MI 019-222
Figure 50 - Measurement Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25 ENTER ENTER

ESC To/From FlwVol
4 Config FlwVol
Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
0.5 To/From FlwBVo
ESC
4 Config FlwBVo (a) Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1 ENTER
ESC To/From Press
4 Config Press
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
3FlwDamp 2 ENTER
ESC To/From FlwTmp
4 Config FlwTmp Config Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 ENTER
ESC To/From Densty
4 Config Densty
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
8 To/From FlwMas
ESC
4 Config FlwMas Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16 3MeasCfg ENTER
ESC To/From Velcty
4 Config Velcty
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
32 To/From Visc
ESC 4 Config Visc Config Menu
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Raw
4 Config Raw
ESC Config Menu
ESC
(a) 4Config FlwBVo is not available in the Steam personality .
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From EleTmp
4 Config EleTmp Config Menu
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From HtCon
4 Config HtCon
ESC Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From HtFlow
4 Config HtFlow Config Menu
ESC
ESC
Figure 51 - Volumetric Flow (FlwVol) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config FlwVol NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
4AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
MI 019-222 123
Figure 52 - Base Volumetric Flow (FlwBVo) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
StdVol
ESC ESC
5EGUTYP NEXT BACK
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
4 Config FlwBVo (a) NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
(a) The Config FlwBVo menu is not available in the

Steam personality.
124 MI 019-222
Figure 53 - Pressure Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE ENTER

ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
4 Config Press NoAlert 0.5
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad 1
ESC ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef 5 Damp 2
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def 4
ESC ESC
5CMethod NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
ByRemote 8
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
MI 019-222 125
Figure 54 - Process Temperature Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Config FlwTmp 5AlertSt AlertBad

ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
4
ESC
5CMethod NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
126 MI 019-222
Figure 55 - Density Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ESC None
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Config Densty 5AlertSt AlertBad

ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 16
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
32
ESC ESC
Figure 56 - Mass Flow (FlwMas) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config FlwMas NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
MI 019-222 127
Figure 57 - Velocity (Velcty) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4 Config Velcty NEXT BACK

ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
Figure 58 - Viscosity (Visc) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
4 Config Visc NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
ESC
NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
By Remote
ESC
128 MI 019-222
Figure 59 - Raw Vortex Frequency (Raw) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
4 Config Raw NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
MI 019-222 129
Figure 60 - Electronic Temperature (EleTemp) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
4 Config EleTmp
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 Damp 2
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
130 MI 019-222
Figure 61 - Heat Content (HtCon) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

None
ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK

ESC 0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
0.5
ESC ESC
4 Config HtCon NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5AlertSt AlertBad
ESC ESC 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
AlertDef
ESC 5 Damp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
User Def
4
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5CMethod User On
ESC ESC 8
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ByRemote
ESC 16
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
MI 019-222 131
Figure 62 - Heat Flow (HtFlow) Configuration Menu Diagram
To/From
MeasCfg Menu
ENTER ESC
ENTER
5 EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 LRV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Config HtFlow 5 URV TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NoAlert
ESC
5AlertSt NEXT BACK
ESC
AlertBad
ESC
132 MI 019-222
Figure 63 - Totalizer Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Tot1
ESC
Energy
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 Total 3 Tot2
ESC
ESC
Energy
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER ENTER
Volume
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolume (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map Mass
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Cnt
ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
3 Tot3
Energy
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
StdVol
ESC NEXT BACK
4 EGUTYP (a)
ESC
NormVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 EGU TO PICK LIST

ESC
(a) BVolume and 4 EGUTYP are not available in the Steam personality .
MI 019-222 133
Figure 64 - Communications Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER NEXT BACK

VolFlow
ENTER
ESC
VolFlow
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
ESC BVolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK NEXT BACK
FlwTmp (a) Pressure

ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
5 Map PV MassFlow NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK Density

ESC
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK NEXT BACK
Velocity Velocity
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Visc
Vor Freq ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Heat Con
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 Map SV HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reynolds
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total1
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total3
ESC
NEXT BACK
Pulse
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Freq
ESC
NEXT BACK
(a) Appears only if these options are selected
in the Model Code. ElecTemp
ESC
NEXT BACK
1/KREF
ESC
NEXT BACK
Rtd ohms (a)

ESC
NEXT BACK
To/From
Map TV on
Com Map Menu
134 MI 019-222
Figure 65 - Communications Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Map SV on
Com Map Menu NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK ENTER
ENTER VolFlow
VolFlow ESC NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
BVolFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Pressure
Pressure ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
FlwTmp ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Density
Density ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
MassFlow
MassFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Velocity
Velocity ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Visc
Visc ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Heat Con
Heat Con ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5 Map QV HeatFlow
5 Map TV HeatFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Reynolds
Reynolds ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total1
Total1 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total2
Total2 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total3
Total3 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Pulse
Pulse ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Vor Freq
Vor Freq ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ElecTemp
ElecTemp ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1/KREF
1/KREF ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Rtd ohms
Rtd ohms ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
MI 019-222 135
Figure 66 - HART Communication and Tag Configuration Menu Diagram
ENTER To/From
4Com Map Map PV on
ESC Com Map Menu
NEXT BACK
4PolAdr TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4Preambl TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4LoopCur TO SELECT ENABLE/DISABLE

ESC
3 Coms NEXT BACK

ENTER
5HartTag TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
5HartLtg TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4Tags NEXT BACK

ESC
5HartMsg TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
5HartDes TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
136 MI 019-222
Figure 67 - mA Output Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
VolFlow
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velocity
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
Vor Freq
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 mA (a)
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Damp 2
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
DwnScale
ESC
4 Fail NEXT BACK
ESC
UpScale
ESC
(a) mA does not apply to low power transmitters or to transmitters with Loop Current Mode disabled.
In both cases, the mA output is set at a fixed value.
MI 019-222 137
Figure 68 - Pulse Output, Pulse Mode Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
4 Pulse NEXT BACK
Freq
ESC
NEXT BACK
Pulse
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
VolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow (a)
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 MapPul MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
Vor Freq
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
0.05 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
0.5 ms
NEXT BACK
4 PWidth 5 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
50 ms
ESC
NEXT BACK
Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4FacEGU TO PICK LIST
NEXT BACK
4 FacU/P TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
4 FacP/U TO EDIT VALUE
(a) BVolFlow is not available in the Steam

personality.
138 MI 019-222
Figure 69 - Pulse Output, Frequency Mode Configuration Menu Diagram
ENTER
None NEXT BACK
ESC ENTER
10 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
100 Hz
4 Pulse NEXT BACK ESC
Freq NEXT BACK

ESC
4 URV 1000 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
Pulse NEXT BACK

ESC
10000 Hz
NEXT BACK ESC
ENTER
VolFlow NEXT BACK
ESC
Custom
NEXT BACK ESC
BVolFlow (a) NEXT BACK

ESC TO EDIT
VALUE
NEXT BACK
4DefFreq TO EDIT VALUE
MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
Velocity ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
0.25
4MapFreq Vor Freq ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
0.5
Density ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1
FlwTmp ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4 Damp 2
Heat Con ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
4
HeatFlow ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
8
4 LRV ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
(a) BVolFlow is not available in the
Steam personality.
32
ESC
MI 019-222 139
Figure 70 - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER To/From
4CfgShow Display Config
ESC Menu – page 2
NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwBVo
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwMas
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velcty
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
Total1
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total3
ESC
NEXT BACK
Densty
ESC
4Show1st (a) NEXT BACK
Visc
ESC
NEXT BACK
Press
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
mA Out
NEXT BACK
PulFrq
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtCon
ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Auto
ESC
4 Cycle NEXT BACK
Manual
ESC
(a) If Show is set to Off for a particular measurement, that

measurement does not appear in the 4Show1st menu.
4Show1st only shows those measurements that are configured
to appear on the Home screen.
140 MI 019-222
Figure 71 - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Display Config
Menu – page 1
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
On
5 Select:
ESC ESC
6 Show NEXT BACK
FlwVol
Off
ESC
FlwBVo (a) NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwMas AutoFmt
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velcty
XXXXXXXX
Total1 ESC
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
XXXXXX.X
Total3 NEXT BACK
Densty XXXXX.XX
ESC
NEXT BACK
Visc
6 Format XXXX.XXX
Press ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
XXX.XXXX
ESC
mA Out NEXT BACK
PulFrq XX.XXXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
X.XXXXXX
HtCon ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
XXXXeXXX
ESC
Figure 72 - Pulse Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Pulse (a) NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
To/From
Totalizer Menu
(a) Only available when Pulse Output is configured in Pulse mode.
MI 019-222 141
Figure 73 - Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
To/From
Totalizer Menu (a)
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot1 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot2 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot3 NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
(a) Goes back to the 1 Pulse menu only when Pulse Output is
configured to Pulse Mode..
142 MI 019-222
Figure 74 - Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Straight
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
1 El Par
ESC
NEXT BACK
1 EL Per
ESC
NEXT BACK
2LoPdPar
ESC
4 Config NEXT BACK
3 Piping (a) 2LoPdPer

ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPar
ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPer
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reducer
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 UpDist
ESC
2 Pipe NEXT BACK

ENTER
Sched 10
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 40
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 80
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN16
ESC
3BoreSch (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
PN40
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN64
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN100
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sanitary
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
(a) Not available for all model codes.
MI 019-222 143
Figure 75 - NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 Model TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Ref No TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 NewMod NEXT BACK

ENTER
4 K EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
3 K Ref NEXT BACK
ESC
4 K Ref TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 76 - Advanced Options Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
General
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Per Sel (a) Steam

ESC
NEXT BACK
Oil&Gas
ESC
NEXT BACK
3AdvOpts (b)
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
2 Advance Normal
ESC
NEXT BACK
3SetMode ViewOnly
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ShowAll
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Basic
ESC
3NoiseRd NEXT BACK
ESC
Method1
ESC
(a) Pulse must be turned off before changing the personality.

(b) 3AdvOpts is reserved for advanced options. Contact Global Customer Support for
information and assistance.
Figure 77 - Resetting the Database Menu Diagram

ENTER
2 SetDef Set Now?
ESC
144 MI 019-222
Figure 78 - Password Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 LoPwd TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
2 Passwd NEXT BACK
3 HiPwd TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 79 - Calibration/Test Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER TO EXECUTE ONE TIME
3 CalLFCI AUTO LFCI SELECTION
ESC
HiPaswd NEXT BACK
(a) ENTER
4Restore
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Loop in 4Cal 4ma

Manual? ESC
2Rd Only
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 3 Cal mA

4Cal20ma
ESC (b) ESC
To/From
Read-only Calib NEXT BACK
and Test menus
4CalDate
ESC
ESC
2 Calib NEXT BACK
4Initial
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
1 Cal/Tst 4Restore
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
TO PICK
3 CalRtd 5RtdEgu LIST
ESC
ESC
4CalUsr NEXT BACK

ESC
TO EDIT
5CurTmp VALUE
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3ClrSrvT Clr Now?

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3Set DIG TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Set mA
ESC TO PICK LIST
(b)
2 Test
ESC NEXT BACK
3 Set Hz
ESC TO EDIT VALUE
(c)
NEXT BACK
3SelfTst TO INVOKE SELFTEST

ESC
(a) Appears only when the Hi password is configured. Entering the password at this point puts the flowmeter in an offline
mode and allows you to proceed with the calibration and test functions. If you do not enter the password, a prompt appears
indicating that the menus are read-only. You can view the menus, but cannot perform calibration or test functions.
(b) Cal mA and Set mA functions are not available when Loop Current is disabled or for Low Power Vortex flowmeters .
(c) Applies to Pulse Frequency Mode only.
MI 019-222 145
Menus for the Oil & Gas Personality

Figure 80 - Status Menu Diagram
ENTER ENTER ENTER To/From

2MeaStat 3 Select Measurement
ESC ESC ESC Status Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
NotProt
ESC
2 WrProt NEXT BACK
ESC
Prot
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 DiagEr
ESC
1 Status
NEXT BACK
2 Reason
ESC
NEXT BACK
2 SW Rev
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3 Primary
ESC
2 Srv Tim NEXT BACK
ESC
3 User
ESC
146 MI 019-222
Figure 81 - Measurement Status Menu Diagram

ENTER
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
Raw 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK mAOut 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ENTER ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
Total NEXT BACK PulFrq 4 EGU

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 More
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER
ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK FlwTmp 4 EGU
ESC
Densty 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ENTER
ESC
4 Status
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK EleTmp 4 EGU
ESC
KCor 4 EGU
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 4 Value

ESC
4 Value
ESC NEXT BACK
ENTER
NEXT BACK 4 Status
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwVol 4 EGU
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Value
ESC
MI 019-222 147
Figure 82 - Oil Gas Main Menu

ENTER
2 SetDef Set Now?
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
2 Puls/U TO EDIT VALUE
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Tuning
2Tuning
Menu
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Output
2 Output
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Pipe
2 Pipe
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From NewMod
2 NewMod
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
To/From Advance
2Advance
Config Menu
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
2Passwd To/From Passwd
Config Menu
ESC
148 MI 019-222
Figure 83 - Tuning Menu Diagram
ENTER
3MaxRate TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3MxRt Hz TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
LFCI 1
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 3
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 4
ESC
NEXT BACK
4Setting
3 LFCI
ESC LFCI 5
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 6
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 7
ESC
NEXT BACK
LFCI 8
ESC
2 Tuning NEXT BACK
4 LfUFac TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 FlwDmp 2
ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Filter TO PICK LIST

ESC
MI 019-222 149
Figure 84 - Output Menus - HART Communication and Tag Configuration Menu Diagram
ENTER To/From
4Com Map Map PV on
ESC Com Map Menu
NEXT BACK
4PolAdr TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4Preambl TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
4LoopCur TO SELECT ENABLE/DISABLE

ESC
3 Coms NEXT BACK

ENTER
5HartTag TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
5HartLtg TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
4Tags NEXT BACK

ESC
5HartMsg TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
NEXT BACK
5HartDes TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
150 MI 019-222
Figure 85 - Output Menus - Communication Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER NEXT BACK

VolFlow
ENTER
ESC
VolFlow
NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
ESC BVolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK NEXT BACK
FlwTmp (a) Pressure

ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
5 Map PV MassFlow NEXT BACK
ESC
NEXT BACK Density

ESC
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK NEXT BACK
Velocity Velocity
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Visc
Vor Freq ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Heat Con
ESC
NEXT BACK
5 Map SV HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reynolds
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total1
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
NEXT BACK
Total3
ESC
NEXT BACK
Pulse
ESC
NEXT BACK
Vor Freq
ESC
NEXT BACK
(a) Appears only if these options are selected
in the Model Code. ElecTemp
ESC
NEXT BACK
1/KREF
ESC
NEXT BACK
Rtd ohms (a)

ESC
NEXT BACK
To/From
Map TV on
Com Map Menu
MI 019-222 151
Figure 86 - Output Menus - Communication Mapping (Com Map) Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Map SV on
Com Map Menu NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK ENTER
ENTER VolFlow
VolFlow ESC NEXT BACK
ESC NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
BVolFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Pressure
Pressure ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
FlwTmp ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Density
Density ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
MassFlow
MassFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Velocity
Velocity ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Visc
Visc ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Heat Con
Heat Con ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
5 Map QV HeatFlow
5 Map TV HeatFlow ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Reynolds
Reynolds ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total1
Total1 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total2
Total2 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Total3
Total3 ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Pulse
Pulse ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Vor Freq
Vor Freq ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
ElecTemp
ElecTemp ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
1/KREF
1/KREF ESC
ESC NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK
Rtd ohms
Rtd ohms ESC
ESC
NEXT BACK
152 MI 019-222
Figure 87 - Output Menus - mA Output Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
VolFlow
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
BVolFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Map MassFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
HeatFlow
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velocity
ESC
NEXT BACK
ESC
Vor Freq
NEXT BACK
ENTER
None
ESC
NEXT BACK
0.25
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 mA (a)
0.5
ESC
NEXT BACK
1
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 Damp 2
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
4
ESC
NEXT BACK
8
ESC
NEXT BACK
16
ESC
NEXT BACK
32
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
DwnScale
ESC
4 Fail NEXT BACK
ESC
UpScale
ESC
(a) mA does not apply to low power transmitters or to transmitters with Loop Current Mode disabled.
In both cases, the mA output is set at a fixed value.
MI 019-222 153
Figure 88 - Output Menus - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (1 of 2)
ENTER To/From
4CfgShow Display Config
ESC Menu – page 2
NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwVol
ESC
NEXT BACK
4Show1st (a)
Total
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Auto
ESC
4 Cycle NEXT BACK
Manual
ESC
(a) If Show is set to Off for a particular measurement , that

measurement does not appear in the 4Show1st menu.
4Show1st only shows those measurements that are configured
to appear on the Home screen.
Figure 89 - Output Menus - Display Configuration Menu Diagram (2 of 2)
To/From
Display Config
Menu – page 1
ENTER ESC
ENTER ENTER
On
5 Select:
ESC ESC
6 Show NEXT BACK
FlwVol
Off
ESC
FlwBVo (a) NEXT BACK
ENTER
FlwMas AutoFmt
ESC
NEXT BACK
Velcty
XXXXXXXX
Total1 ESC
NEXT BACK
Total2
ESC
XXXXXX.X
Total3 NEXT BACK
Densty XXXXX.XX
ESC
NEXT BACK
Visc
6 Format XXXX.XXX
Press ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
FlwTmp
XXX.XXXX
ESC
mA Out NEXT BACK
PulFrq XX.XXXXX
ESC
NEXT BACK
Raw
X.XXXXXX
HtCon ESC
NEXT BACK
HtFlow
XXXXeXXX
ESC
154 MI 019-222
Figure 90 - Pipe Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER
Straight
ESC ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
1 El Par
ESC
NEXT BACK
1 EL Per
ESC
NEXT BACK
2LoPdPar
ESC
4 Config NEXT BACK
3 Piping (a) 2LoPdPer

ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPar
ESC
NEXT BACK
2L5PdPer
ESC
NEXT BACK
Reducer
ESC
NEXT BACK
4 UpDist
ESC
2 Pipe NEXT BACK

ENTER
Sched 10
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 40
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sched 80
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN16
ESC
3BoreSch (a) NEXT BACK

ESC
PN40
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN64
ESC
NEXT BACK
PN100
ESC
NEXT BACK
Sanitary
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Custom TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
(a) Not available for all model codes.
MI 019-222 155
Figure 91 - NewMod Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 Model TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Ref No TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
2 NewMod NEXT BACK

ENTER
4 K EGU TO PICK LIST
ESC
3 K Ref NEXT BACK
ESC
4 K Ref TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
Figure 92 - Advanced Options Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER
General
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Per Sel (a) Steam

ESC
NEXT BACK
Oil&Gas
ESC
NEXT BACK
3AdvOpts (b)
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
2 Advance Normal
ESC
NEXT BACK
3SetMode ViewOnly
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
ShowAll
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
Basic
ESC
3NoiseRd NEXT BACK
ESC
Method1
ESC
(a) Pulse must be turned off before changing the personality.

(b) 3AdvOpts is reserved for advanced options. Contact Global Customer Support for
information and assistance.
Figure 93 - Password Configuration Menu Diagram

ENTER
3 LoPwd TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
2 Passwd NEXT BACK
3 HiPwd TO EDIT VALUE

ESC
156 MI 019-222
Figure 94 - Calibration/Test Menu Diagram

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER TO EXECUTE ONE TIME
3 CalLFCI AUTO LFCI SELECTION
ESC
HiPaswd NEXT BACK
(a) ENTER
4Restore
ESC
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK Loop in 4Cal 4ma

Manual? ESC
2Rd Only
NEXT BACK
NEXT BACK 3 Cal mA

4Cal20ma
ESC (b) ESC
To/From
Read-only Calib NEXT BACK
and Test menus
4CalDate
ESC
ESC
2 Calib NEXT BACK
4Initial
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
1 Cal/Tst 4Restore
ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
TO PICK
3 CalRtd 5RtdEgu LIST
ESC
ESC
4CalUsr NEXT BACK

ESC
TO EDIT
5CurTmp VALUE
ESC ESC
NEXT BACK
3ClrSrvT Clr Now?

ESC
NEXT BACK
ENTER
3Set DIG TO EDIT VALUE
ESC
NEXT BACK
3 Set mA
ESC TO PICK LIST
(b)
2 Test
ESC NEXT BACK
3 Set Hz
ESC TO EDIT VALUE
(c)
NEXT BACK
3SelfTst TO INVOKE SELFTEST

ESC
(a) Appears only when the Hi password is configured. Entering the password at this point puts the flowmeter in an offline
mode and allows you to proceed with the calibration and test functions. If you do not enter the password, a prompt appears
indicating that the menus are read-only. You can view the menus, but cannot perform calibration or test functions.
(b) Cal mA and Set mA functions are not available when Loop Current is disabled or for Low Power Vortex flowmeters .
(c) Applies to Pulse Frequency Mode only.
MI 019-222 157
Figure 95 - Totalizer Actions Top Level Menu Diagram
To/From
Totalizer Menu
NEXT BACK
Off
ENTER
NEXT BACK
On
1 Tot NEXT BACK
Resume
NEXT BACK
Clear
ESC
158 MI 019-222
Using the HART Communicator Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Using the HART Communicator

This chapter describes how to operate the flowmeter with the HART Communicator. It
also provides the menu diagrams that are available from the HART Communicator.
Setting Digital Measurement Values Remotely

Use Cmd: 192 (0xC0) Write Measurement Remote Data to set digital measurement
values remotely.
Example: Setting Pressure to 14.7 psia

NOTE: Pressure is used only for the SuperHeatedSteam fluid type. For
SuperHeatedSteam, pressure can be set to a default value or can be configured
to be read with HART.
HART Command Type Device Specific
HART Version 7
HART Operation Type WRITE
HART Command 82xxxxxxxxxxC007030300416B3333
Table 62 - Request: 16 (0x10) Bytes (Plus Preambles)
Pos Size Type Fixed Example Description
0 1 byte Fixed 0x82 Request delimiter
1 5 byte Variable 0x?????????? Device address
6 1 byte Fixed 0xC0 Command 192
7 1 byte Fixed 0x07 Data length (not including checksum)
8 1 byte Variable 0x03 Transmitter variable (Pressure)
9 2 byte Variable 0x0300 Measurement units (psia). This

measurement unit is for reference
only. It must match the device’s
currently configured measurement. If
the measurement does not match,
the command is rejected with status
error 12 (0x0C).
11 4 real Variable 0x416B3333 Measurement remote value (14.7)
15 1 byte Variable 0x?? HART checksum
Table 63 - Response: 18 (0x12) Bytes (Plus Preambles)
0 1 byte Fixed 0x82 Response delimiter
1 5 byte Variable 0x?????????? Device address
6 1 byte Fixed 0xC0 Command 192
7 1 byte Fixed 0x09 Data length (not including checksum)
8 1 byte Variable 0x00 HART command status (Return

Code)
MI 019-222 159
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Using the HART Communicator
Table 63 - Response: 18 (0x12) Bytes (Plus Preambles) (Continued)
9 1 byte Variable 0x?? HART device status (Configuration

Changed flag set)
10 1 byte Variable 0x03 Transmitter variable (Pressure)
11 2 byte Variable 0x0300 Measurement units (psia)
13 4 real Variable 0x416B3333 Measurement remote value (14.7)
15 1 byte Variable 0x?? HART checksum
Parameters for Cmd: 192

Table 64 - Possible HART Command Status Errors from the Transmitter
(0) 0x00 Success No command-specific errors
(2) 0x02 Error Invalid code or index for transmitter variable
(3) 0x03 Error Passed parameter too large
(4) 0x04 Error Passed parameter too small
(5) 0x05 Error Too few data bytes received
(6) 0x06 Error Device-specific command error
(12) 0x0C Error Invalid units code
(16) 0x10 Error Access restricted (mode error or busy for HART universal or common
practice commands)
(32) 0x20 Error Device busy
Table 65 - Transmitter Variables
Pressure (Absolute) 0x03
Temperature (RTD) 0x05
Density 0x06
Viscosity (Absolute) 0x09
Heat Content 0x0D
Table 66 - Measurement Units
Measurement Hex Value EGU Description
Pressure (Absolute) 0x0300 psia pounds per square inch, absolute
Pressure (Absolute) 0x0309 Paa pascals, absolute
Pressure (Absolute) 0x0308 kPaa kilopascals, absolute
Pressure (Absolute) 0x03FF Custom custom absolute pressure
Temperature (RTD) 0x0602 degF degrees Fahrenheit
Temperature (RTD) 0x0603 degR degrees Rankine
Temperature (RTD) 0x0600 degC degrees Celsius
Temperature (RTD) 0x0601 K Kelvins
Density 0x0803 lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot
160 MI 019-222
Table 66 - Measurement Units (Continued)
Measurement Hex Value EGU Description
Density 0x0807 lb/gal pounds per US gallon
Density 0x0802 oz/in3 ounces per cubic inch
Density 0x0800 kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter
Density 0x0808 kg/l kilograms per liter
Density 0x0801 g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter
Density 0x0804 lb/Yd3 pounds per cubic yard
Density 0x0805 LT/Yd3 long tons per cubic yard
Density 0x0806 ST/Yd3 short tons per cubic yard
Density 0x08FF Custom custom density
Viscosity (Absolute) 0x1500 PaSec pascal-second
Viscosity (Absolute) 0x1501 cPoise centipoise
Heat Content 0x2100 J/kg joules per kilogram
Heat Content 0x2101 kJ/kg kilojoules per kilogram
Heat Content 0x2102 BTU/lb BTU per pound
Heat Content 0x2103 MCal/kg megacalories per kilogram
MI 019-222 161
HART Communicator Menus

NOTE: If you are making changes to the flowmeter’s configuration in the Basic or
Detailed Setup, make sure you turn off totalizer and pulse outputs first, and then
turn it back on after the changes are complete.
Menus for the General and Steam Personalities

Figure 96 - Main Menu Diagram
1. Device Setup 1. Process Variables 1. PV Unit

2. PV 2. Diag/Service 2. PV % Range
3. PV Loop Current 3. Basic Setup 3. PV Loop Current
4. PV URV 4. Detailed Setup 4. PV
5. PV USL 5. Review 15 5. SV
6. LFCI - Setting 6. TV
7. LFCI 7. QV
8. Flow Vol Custom Label 8. Raw Frequency
9. Flow Vol Custom Offset 9. Totalizer 1
Flow Vol Custom Slope Totalizer 1 RO Value
SV Totalizer 2
TV Totalizer 2 RO Value
QV Totalizer 3
1. Model Code
Totalizer 3 RO Value
2. Pulse Available
Velocity
3. Elec Temp Available
Density
4. Fluid Type
Viscosity
5. K Corrected Units
Pressure
6. K Reference
Reynolds Number
7. mA/PV Map
K Corrected
8. PV URV
Temperature
9. PV Damp
Elec Temp
Tag
Flow Vol
Long Tag
Flow Mass
Loop Current Mode
Flow Base Vol (a)
LFCI - Setting
LFCI
Heat Content
1. Fluid
1 6
Heat Flow
2. Tuning 7
Pulse (b)
3. Totalizers 8
4. Measurement 9
5. Output Configuration 10
6. Pipe 11 1 Totalizer 1
7. New Tube 12 2 Auto LFCI

8. Advance 13 3. Self Test
9. Device Information 14 4. Loop Test 2
5. Calibration 3
(a) Flow Base Vol is not available in the Steam personality. 6. Measurement Status 4
(b) Available when model code supports “Pulse” and Pulse
mode is set to Raw, Frequency, or Pulse. 7. Detail Status 5
162 MI 019-222
Figure 97 - Diag/Service Menu Diagrams

Device Setup > Diag/Service >
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Totalizers
Measurement Status
1 1. Pulse State (a) 4 1. Raw Frequency
2. Pulse Operation (a) 2. Raw Frequency Status
3. Totalizer 1 3. Totalizer 1
4. Totalizer 1 RO Value 4. Totalizer 1 Status
5. Totalizer 1 State 5. Totalizer 1 RO Value
6. Totalizer 1 Operations 6. Totalizer 2
7. Totalizer 2 7. Totalizer 2 Status
8. Totalizer 2 RO Value 8. Totalizer 2 RO Value
9. Totalizer 2 State 9. Totalizer 3
Totalizer 2 Operations Totalizer 3 Status
Totalizer 3 Totalizer 3 RO Value
Totalizer 3 RO Value Velocity
Totalizer 3 State Velocity Status
Totalizer 3 Operations Density
Density Status
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Loop Test
Viscosity
2 1. Set Digital Out
Viscosity Status
2. Set Analog Out
Pressure
3. Set Pulse Out (a)
Pressure Status
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Calibration Reynolds Number

Reynolds Number Status
3 1. D/A Trim (b)
1
K Corrected
2. Scaled D/A trim (b)
1. Restore RTD Calibration (c) K Corrected Status
3. Restore mA Calibration
2. RTD Calibration (c) mA
4. RTD Calibration
mA Status
5. Calibration Date
Pulse (a)
6. Time in Service 1. User Days
Pulse Status (a)
2. Total Days
Temperature
3. Reset Time in Service
Temperature Status
Elec Temp (c)
Elec Temp Status (c)
Flow Vol
Flow Vol Status
Flow Mass
Flow Mass Status
Flow Base Vol
Flow Base Vol Status
Heat Content
Heat Content Status
Heat Flow
1
Heat Flow Status
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Detail Status
5 1. Reason Code
2. Device Alert Status
3. Device Notice Status
(a) Available when model code has Pulse and Pulse 4. PV Overrange
Mode is set to Pulse.
Available when model code supports Pulse and Pulse 5. Stuck Key
mode is set to Raw, Frequency, or Pulse.
(b) Available when Loop Current Mode is Enabled. 6. Heart Beat
(c) Available when MS Code is RTD. 7. Diag Alert
(d) Available when model code supports Temperature.
(e) Flow Base Vol and Flow Base Vol Status are not 8. Write Protect
available in the Steam personality.
MI 019-222 163
Figure 98 - Detailed Setup - Fluid Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detiled Setup > Fluid
6 1. Fluid Type
1 16
2. Fluid Name
3. Temperature Config 17
4. Base Temperature
5. Density Config 18
6. Base Density
Pressure Config
7. Pressure Config 19
8. Base Pressure 1
19 1 Pressure Units (c)
9. Viscosity Config 20 2 Pressure LRV
Custom Fluid Coef 21 3. Pressure URV
4. Pressure Default
5. Pressure Alert Strategy
Set Fluid Default
6. Pressure Mode
16 1.User
1 UserGas
Gas (a) 7. Pressure HART Remote Value (d)
2 User
2. UserVapor
Vapor (a) 8. Pressure Damping
3. User Liquid (a)
Viscosity Config
4. Saturated Steam (b)
20 1 Viscosity Unit
5. Superheated Steam (b)
2 Viscosity Default
Temperature Config 3. Viscosity Alert Strategy
17 1 Temperature Units
1. 4. Viscosity Mode
2. Temperature LRV 5. Viscosity HART Remote Value (d)
3. Temperature URV
Custom Fluid Coef
4. Temperature
Saturated Steam
Default
21 Thermal Coef Density (e)
1
5. Temperature
Superheated Alert
Steam Strategy
Thermal Dens Ref Temp (e)
6. Temperature Mode
Reference Density (e)
7. Temperature Damp
Thermal Coef Viscosity (e)
Density Config Thermal Visc Ref Temp (e)
18 1 Density Units (c) Thermal Ref Viscosity (e)
2 Density LRV
3. Density URV (a) User Liquid, User Vapor, and User Gas are only available
in the General Personality.
4. Density Default
(b) Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam are only
5. Density Alert Strategy available in the Steam personality.
(c) If Units are set to Custom, additional fields for Custom
6. Density Mode Label, Custom Offset, and Custom Slope are available.
7. Density HART Remote Value (d) (d) Available only when Mode is set to ByRemote.
(e) Not available in the Steam personality.
8. Density Damp
164 MI 019-222
Figure 99 - Detailed Setup - Tuning Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Tuning
7 1. Reynolds Correction
2. LFCI - Setting
3. LFCI
Figure 100 - Detailed Setup - Totalizers Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Totalizers
8 1. Totalizer 1 1. Totalizer 1 Map

2. Totalizer 2 2. Totalizer 1 Units (a)
3. Totalizer 3
1. Totalizer 2 Map
2. Totalizer 2 Units (a)
1. Totalizer 3 Map
2. Totalizer 3 Units (a)
(a) If Units are set to Custom, additional fields for Custom

Label, Custom Offset, and Custom Slope are available.
MI 019-222 165
Figure 101 - Detailed Setup - Measurement Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Measurement
9 1. Flow Vol Damp 1. Flow Vol Config 22

2. Measurement Configuration 2. Flow Base Vol Config 23
3. Pressure Config 24
Flow Vol Config 4. Temperature Config 25
5. Density Config 26
22 1. Flow Vol Units (a)
6. Flow Mass Config 27
2. Flow Vol URV
7. Velocity Config 28
3. Flow Vol Alert Strategy
8. Viscosity Config 29
9. Raw Frequency Config 30
Flow Base Vol Config (b) Ele Temp Config 31
Heat Content Config 32
23 1. Flow Base Vol Units (a)
Heat Flow Config 33
2. Flow Base Vol URV
3. Flow Base Vol Alert Strategy
Velocity Config
28 1 Velocity Config
Pressure Config 2 Velocity URV
24 1. Pressure Units (a) 3. Velocity Alert Strategy

2. Pressure LRV
Viscosity Config
3. Pressure URV
29 1. Viscosity Units
4. Pressure Default
2. Viscosity Default
5. Pressure Alert Strategy
3. Viscosity Alert Strategy
6. Pressure Mode
7. Pressure HART Remote Value (c) 4. Viscosity Mode
5. Viscosity HART Remote Value (c)
8. Pressure Damp
Raw Frequency
Temperature Config
1. Temperature Units 30 1. Raw Frequency Units

25
2. Temperature LRV 2. Raw Frequency URV
3. Temperature URV
Ele Temp Config (d)
4. Temperature Default
31 1. Ele Temp Units
5. Temperature Alert Strategy
2. Ele Temp LRV
6. Temperature Mode
7. Temperature HART Remote Value (c)
3. Ele Temp URV
4. Ele Temp Default
8. Temperature Damp
5. Ele Temp Alert Strategy
Density Config 6. Ele Temp Damp
26 1. Density Units (a)

Heat Content Config
2. Density LRV
3. Density URV 32 1. Heat Content Units
4. Density Default 2. Heat Content LRV
5. Density Alert Strategy 3. Heat Content URV
6. Density Mode 4. Heat Content Default
7. Density HART Remote Value (c) 5. Heat Content Alert Strategy

5 6. Heat Content Mode
8. Density Damp
7. Heat Content HART Remote Value (c)
Flow Mass Config 8. Heat Content Damp
27 1. Flow Mass Units (a)

Heat Flow Config
2. Flow Mass URV
3. Flow Mass Alert Strategy 33 1. Heat Flow Units
2. Heat Flow LRV
(a) If Units are set to Custom, additional fields for Custom 3. Heat Flow URV
(b) Not available in the Steam personality. 4. Heat Flow Alert Strategy
(c) Available only when Mode is set to ByRemote.
(d) Available when MS Code is RTD.
166 MI 019-222
Figure 102 - Detailed Setup - Output Configuration Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Output Configuration
10 1. Digital Output 34
2. Analog Output (a) 35
3. Pulse Output (b) 36
4. HART Output 37
5. Alarm Code (a) 38
6. Local Display 39
Digital Output
34 1. mA/PV Map
2. SV Map
3. TV Map
4. QV Map
Analog Output (a)
35 1. mA/PV Map
2. mA Damp
Pulse Output (b)
36 1. Pulse Mode None 1. Frequency Map

Raw 2. Set Frequency URV
Frequency 3. Frequency URV
Pulse 4. Frequency LRV
5. Damping
1. Pulse Map
2. Set Pulse Width
3. Pulse Width
4. Fac Units
HART Output 5. Fac Pulses per Pulse
37 1. Poll Addr 6. Fac Pulses per Units
2. Loop Current Mode
3. Num Req Preams
4. Num Resp Preams
1. Flow Vol (On/Off) 1. Flow Vol Display (On/Off)

Alarm Code (a)
2. Flow Vol Display Format
1. Set mA Fully Downscale 2. Flow Base Vol (On/Off) 1. Flow Base Vol Display (On/Off)
37
(d)
2. Set mA Fully Upscale 2. Flow Base Vol Display Format
3. Flow Mass (On/Off) 1. Flow Mass (On/Off)
Local Display 2. Flow Mass Display Format

2. Flow Base Vol (On/Off)
4. Velocity (On/Off) 1. Velocity Display (On/Off)
39 1. Show 2. Velocity Display Format
2. Primary Display (c) 5. Totalizer 1 (On/Off) 1. Totalizer 1 Display (On/Off)
3. Display Cycle 2. Totalizer 1 Display Format
6. Totalizer 2 (On/Off) 1. Totalizer 2 Display (On/Off)
2. Totalizer 2 Display Format
7. Totalizer 3 (On/Off) 1. Totalizer 3 Display (On/Off)
(a) Available only when Loop Current Mode is enabled. 2. Totalizer 3 Display Format
1. Density Display (On/Off)
(b) Available only when Model Code has Pulse. 8. Density (On/Off)
(c) Available only if at least one of the measurement’s 2. Density Display Format
display is On. 1. Viscosity Display (On/Off)
(d) Not available in the Steam personality. 9. Viscosity (On/Off)
(e) Available when Pulse Mode is Pulse. 2. Viscosity Display Format
1. Pressure Display (On/Off)
Pressure (On/Off)
2. Pressure Display Format
Temperature (On/Off) 1. Temperature Display (On/Off)

2. Temperature Display Format
mA Out (On/Off) 1. mA Out Display (On/Off)
2. mA Out Display Format
Pulse Output (On/Off)
(e) 1. Pulse Frequency Display (On/Off)
2. Pulse Frequency Display Format
Raw (On/Off) 1. Raw Frequency (On/Off)
2. Raw Frequency Format
Heat Content (On/Off) 1. Heat Content Display (On/Off)
2. Heat Content Display Format
Heat Flow (On/Off) 1. Heat Flow Display (On/Off)
2. Heat Flow Display Format
MI 019-222 167
Figure 103 - Detailed Setup - Pipe, New Tube, Advance, and Device Info Menu Diagram
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Pipe
11 1. Piping 1. Piping Configuration

2. Bore Schedule 2. Upstream Distance
3. Custom K Reference Bias
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > New Tube
12 1. Model Code
2. Pulse Available
5. Reference Number
6. K Reference 1. K Corrected Units
2. K Reference
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Advance
13 1. Personality
2. Noise Reduction Behavior
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Device Information
14 1. Manufacturer
2. Tag
3. Long Tag
4. Descriptor
5. Message
6. Calibration Date
7. Revisions 1. Universal Rev
2. Fld Dev Rev
3. Software Rev
4. Software Sub-Revision
5. Hardware Rev
6. Firmware Revision
168 MI 019-222
Figure 104 - Review Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Review
15 1. Model Code Alarm Code

2. Reference Number Fluid Name
3. K Reference Fluid Type
4. mA/PV Map Temperature Units
5. PV URV Temperature
6. PV Damp Elec Temp Units (d)
7. PV USL Elec Temp (d)
8. PV Min Span Density Units (a)
9. LFCI - Setting Density
LFCI Base Density
Totalizer 1 Units (a) Viscosity Units
Totalizer 1 Viscosity
Totalizer 1 RO Value Heat Content Units
Totalizer 2 Units (a) Heat Content
Totalizer 2 Heat Flow Units
Totalizer 2 RO Value Heat Flow
Totalizer 3 Units (a) Bore Schedule
Totalizer 3 Piping Configuration
Totalizer 3 RO Value Upstream Distance
Flow Vol Units (a) Custom K Reference Bias
Flow Vol Manufacturer
Flow Base Vol Units (a) Dev id
Flow Base Vol Tag
Flow Mass Units (a) Long Tag
Flow Mass Descriptor
Pressure Units (a) Message
Pressure Calibration Date
Velocity Units Universal Rev
Velocity Fld Dev Rev
Velocity Units
Pulse Mode (b) Software Rev
Frequency Map (c) Software Sub-Revision
Frequency URV (c) Firmware Revision
Frequency LRV (c) DD Revision
Default Frequency (c) Hardware Rev
Damping (c) Poll Addr
Pulse Map (c) Loop Current Mode
Pulse Width (c) Num Req Preams
Fac Units per Pulse (c) Num Resp Preams
Fac Pulses per Unit (c)
(a) If Units are set to Custom, additional fields for Custom

(b) This field depends on the Pulse Mode selected.
(c) The fields displayed are based on the Pulse Mode that
was selected.
(d) Available when MS Code is RTD.
MI 019-222 169
Menus for the Oil & Gas Personality

Figure 105 - Main Menu Diagram
1. Device Setup 1. Process Variables 1. PV Unit

2. PV 2. Diag/Service 2. PV % Range
3. PV Loop Current 3. Basic Setup 3. PV Loop Current
4. PV URV 4. Detailed Setup 4. PV
5. PV USL 5. Review 12 5. SV
6. LFCI - Setting 6. TV
7. LFCI 7. QV
8. SV 8. Raw Frequency
9. TV 9. Totalizer 1
QV Totalizer 1 RO Value
Density
K Corrected
Temperature
1. Model Code
Flow Vol
2. Pulse Available
LFCI - Setting
LFCI
4. K Corrected Units
Pulse (a)
5. K Reference
6. Tag
7. Long Tag
1 Totalizer 1
2 Auto LFCI
9. Flow Vol Units
3. Self Test
Pulse Frequency Factor
4. Loop Test 2
5. Calibration 3
1. Tuning
1 6
6. Measurement Status 4
2. Output Configuration 7
7. Detail Status 5
3. Pipe 8
4. New Tube 9
5. Advance 10 (a) Available when model code has Pulse.
6. Device Information 11
170 MI 019-222
Figure 106 - Diag/Service Menu Diagrams

Device Setup > Diag/Service >
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Totalizers
Measurement Status
1 1. Totalizer 1 4 1. Raw Frequency
2. Totalizer 1 RO Value 2. Raw Frequency Status
3. Totalizer 1 State 3. Totalizer 1
4. Totalizer 1 Operations 4. Totalizer 1 Status
5. Totalizer 1 RO Value
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Loop Test 6. Density
2 1. Set Digital Out 7. Density Status
2. Set Analog Out 8. K Corrected
3. Set Pulse Out (a) 9. K Corrected Status
mA
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Calibration
mA Status
3 1. D/A Trim (b)
1 Pulse (a)
2. Scaled D/A Trim (b) Pulse Status (a)
1. Restore RTD Calibration (c)
3. Restore mA Calibration Temperature
(b) 2. RTD Calibration (c)
Temperature Status
4. RTD Calibration
Flow Vol
5. Calibration Date
1. User Days Flow Vol Status
6. Time in Service
2. Total Days
3. Reset Time in Service
Device Setup > Diag/Service > Detail Status
5 1. Reason Code
(a) Available when model MS Code is Pulse only. 2. Device Alert Status
(b) Available when Loop Current Mode is Enabled.
(c) Available when MS Code is RTD. 3. Device Notice Status
4. PV Overrange
5. Stuck Key
6. Heart Beat
7. Diag Alert
8. Write Protect
Figure 107 - Detailed Setup - Tuning Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detiled Setup > Tuning
6 1. Max Rate
1
2. Pulse Max
3. LFCI - Setting
4. LFCI
5. Flow Vol Damp
6. Filter
MI 019-222 171
Figure 108 - Detailed Setup - Output Configuration Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Output Configuration
7 1. Digital Output 13
2. Analog Output (a) 14
3. HART Output 15
4. Alarm Code (a) 16
5. Local Display 17
Digital Output
13 1. mA/PV Map
2. SV Map
3. TV Map
4. QV Map
Analog Output (a)
14 1. mA/PV Map
2. mA Damp
HART Output
15 1. Poll Addr
3. Num Req Preams
4. Num Resp Preams
1. Flow Vol (On/Off) 1. Flow Vol Display (On/Off)

Alarm Code (a)
2. Flow Vol Display Format
16 1. Set mA Fully Downscale 2. Flow Base Vol (On/Off) 1. Flow Base Vol Display (On/Off)
2. Set mA Fully Upscale 2. Flow Base Vol Display Format
3. Flow Mass (On/Off) 1. Flow Mass (On/Off)
Local Display 2. Flow Mass Display Format

2. Flow Base Vol (On/Off)
4. Velocity (On/Off) 1. Velocity Display (On/Off)
17 1. Show 2. Velocity Display Format
2. Primary Display (b) 5. Totalizer 1 (On/Off) 1. Totalizer 1 Display (On/Off)
3. Display Cycle 2. Totalizer 1 Display Format
1. Density Display (On/Off)
6. Density (On/Off)
2. Density Display Format
7. Viscosity (On/Off) 1. Viscosity Display (On/Off)

2. Viscosity Display Format
(a) Available only when Loop Current Mode 1. Pressure Display (On/Off)
8. Pressure (On/Off)
is enabled.
2. Pressure Display Format
(b) Available only if at least one of the
measurement’s display is On. 9. Temperature (On/Off) 1. Temperature Display (On/Off)
(c) Available when Pulse Mode is Pulse.
2. Temperature Display Format
mA Out (On/Off) 1. mA Out Display (On/Off)
2. mA Out Display Format
Pulse Output (On/Off)
(c) 1. Pulse Frequency Display (On/Off)
2. Pulse Frequency Display Format
Raw (On/Off) 1. Raw Frequency (On/Off)
2. Raw Frequency Format
Heat Content (On/Off) 1. Heat Content Display (On/Off)
2. Heat Content Display Format
Heat Flow (On/Off) 1. Heat Flow Display (On/Off)
2. Heat Flow Display Format
172 MI 019-222
Figure 109 - Detailed Setup - Pipe, New Tube, Advance, and Device Info Menu Diagram
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Pipe
8 1. Piping 1. Piping Configuration

2. Bore Schedule 2. Upstream Distance
3. Custom K Reference Bias
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > New Tube
9 1. Model Code
2. Pulse Available
5. Reference Number
6. K Reference 1. K Corrected Units
2. K Reference
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Advance
10 1. Personality
2. Noise Reduction Behavior
Device Setup > Detailed Setup > Device Info
11 1. Manufacturer
2. Tag
3. Long Tag
4. Descriptor
5. Message
6. Calibration Date
7. Revisions 1. Universal Rev
2. Fld Dev Rev
3. Software Rev
4. Software Sub-Revision
5. Hardware Rev
6. Firmware Revision
MI 019-222 173
Figure 110 - Review Menu Diagram

Device Setup > Review
15 1. Model Code
2. Reference Number
3. K Reference
4. LFCI - Setting
5. LFCI
6. Totalizer 1
7. Flow Vol Units
8. Flow Vol
9. Alarm Code
Temperature
Density
Manufacturer
Dev id
Tag
Long TagUnits
Velocity
Descriptor
Message
Calibration Date
Universal Rev
Field Dev Rev
Software Rev
Software Sub-Revision
Firmware Revision
DD Revision
Hardware Revision
Poll Addr
Loop Current Mode
Num Req Preams
Num Resp Preams
174 MI 019-222
Troubleshooting Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting the flowmeter, verify that the flowmeter has been configured
with the correct model, flow, and output parameters. If there is a problem, the display
indicates W:Input (warning), B:Input (bad), or CfgErr (configuration error, such as
RTD Open).
Loss of Signal Warning
WARNING
HAZARD OF FLOWMETER CORROSION OR WEAR
If the flowrate signal appears to have a calibration shift or goes to zero, check the
flowmeter for corrosion or wear.
equipment damage.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Components in your flowmeter are ESD-sensitive, and thus are susceptible to
damage resulting from electrostatic discharge. When performing maintenance in
the electronics compartment or remote junction box, or when working with the
housing cover removed, ground yourself with a conductive wrist strap or stand on
an ESD mat.
Output Indicates Flow When There Is No Flow

In some installations, the flowmeter can indicate flow when the line is shut down. This
could be the effect of a leaking valve, sloshing fluid, or vibrational noise sources such
as pumps.
• Check the Low Flow Cut-In (LFCI) setting.
The LFCI setting determines the sensitivity of the electronics to the sensor output
signal. There are eight LFCI settings. The default is level 4, which is suitable for
most applications. Should there be excessive vibration, resulting in false
excitation of the vortex sensor, it may be necessary to increase the LFCI setting.
Refer to Setting the LFCI, page 181.
• If the LFCI is higher than desired, there are several possible causes:
◦ Check the flowmeter sizing. The flowmeter could be too big for the application,
resulting in the need to provide a measurement at a very low flow velocity.
Refer to FlowExpertPro™ Sizing Application, page 23 to validate meter sizing.
◦ Check for excessive vibration. For most applications where the electronics are
top mounted and the pipe has horizontal pipe supports, lateral vibration of the
pipes may result in false signal. Reposition the meter so that the electronics
are at approximately the 3 o’clock or 4 o’clock position (see Sensor Mounting
to Minimize the Effect of Vibration, page 40). The sensor axis is then
perpendicular to the vibration.
◦ Examine peripheral equipment and potential vibration sources to be sure that
they are not imparting vibration into the flowmeter.
MI 019-222 175
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Troubleshooting
• Other sources of false signal:

◦ Check for 60 Hz signal pickup. Check the output of the flowmeter against the
expected value for a 60 Hz input signal. If 60 Hz interference is present,
examine the flowmeter and interconnecting wiring for proper grounding and
shielding.
◦ If the flowmeter is remotely mounted, verify that the remote cable is properly
terminated. The cable was properly terminated at the factory. If the cable was
shortened, check the termination. See Remotely Mounted Electronics, page
55.
NOTE: If you must shorten the cable, shorten it from the flowtube end
only.
No Output with Flow

If a flowmeter has no or low output during flow conditions, follow these troubleshooting
steps.
The Display (if Applicable) Is Blank

1. Remove the field wiring cover and check the power supply voltage. The voltage
across the + and - terminals must be between 15.75 and 42 V dc for HART;
between 10 and 42 V dc35 for Low Power.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the termination compartment. Moisture could
be a result of a loose cable/conduit connection, or a cover that is not fully
engaged.
3. If voltage at the terminals is 0, check for a blown fuse in the power supply, or
damaged wires.
4. If voltage is below the minimum, check the loop load vs supply voltage. Refer to
Supply Voltage vs Output Load for 4 to 20 mA Output, page 13.
5. If voltage is correct, check the voltage on the cable inside the housing to verify
that the protection circuit in the terminal block assembly has not been damaged.
If no voltage is present on the cable inside the housing, replace the terminal block
assembly.
There Is a Low Output Signal (and a Lighted Display, if Applicable)

1. Check the LFCI setting. This sets the point below which flow is not measured.
If flow is greater than this level, and there is still no change in output, continue to
the next step.
2. Check the flowmeter status to see if it has “failed low.” The flowmeter is
configurable to fail either low or high.
• The fail-low mode value is 3.6 mA.
• The fail-high mode value is 21 mA.
3. Verify that the flowmeter can output the desired signal by going to the Test mode
and setting the outputs for fail-low and fail-high.
4. Check the pulse output default value, if applicable.
10 V dc.
176 MI 019-222
No or Low Output with Remotely Mounted Electronics

If a flowmeter with remotely mounted electronics has no or low output during flow
conditions, follow these troubleshooting steps.
1. Inspect the preamplifier for discoloration, which could be the result of
overheating. Check the maximum ambient temperature specification in the
electrical certification table (see Electrical Certifications, page 29) and/or the
flowmeter’s data label.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the termination compartment. Moisture could
be a result of a loose cable/conduit connection or a cover that was not fully
engaged.
3. Check the voltage levels at the junction box on top of the flowmeter body.
The following values should be observed:
• Red to yellow: +3.0 ±0.3 V
• Orange to yellow: -3.0 ±0.3 V
If these values are not observed, there may be a break or cut in the cable
between the flowmeter and the remote electronics. Or, the preamplifier may not
be working.
4. Verify that the wires are fully engaged in the connectors. Lightly tug each wire to
verify that it is firmly held in place by the connector, on the metal conductor and
not on the wire insulation. If any wires are not engaged, press the lever in the
connector, insert the bare conductor, and release the lever, checking again that
the wire is firmly clamped.
5. Check for sensor output using a small portable scope meter. There should be a
sinelike waveform on the meter. This waveform does not have to be sinusoidal,
but it should show alternating output. The amplitude of the signal depends on the
sensor type and velocity. The frequency of the output should be in accordance
with the expected flow rate.
MI 019-222 177
6. Check the preamplifier:

a. Disconnect the sensor leads.
b. For a standard temperature sensor, connect a 2200 pF ±5% 50 V NPO
ceramic capacitor to the brown (+) terminal of the sensor terminal block.
c. For an extended temperature sensor, replace the 2200 pF capacitor with a
22 pF capacitor. Set the frequency input amplitude to 0.5 V peak-to-peak.
The output from the preamplifier should be 1.5x the input value, or 0.75 V
peak-to-peak, and be at the same frequency as the input.
d. Connect a portable frequency generator that can supply a sinusoidal 0.5 V
peak-to-peak signal to the sensor input terminals.
e. Identify the expected sensor frequency for the flow rate going through the
flowmeter. Use the FlowExpertPro™ sizing program to determine this, or
compute the frequency based on the K-factor stamped on the flowmeter
body.
f. Recheck the output at the remote electronics.
• If there is output at the electronics, the sensor may need to be replaced.
• If there is no output at the remote electronics, check the preamplifier by
disconnecting the blue and yellow wires from the remote cable. (The
orange and red wires should stay connected, as they provide power to
the preamplifier.) Connect the scope meter to the blue and yellow (+ and
-) terminals on the output terminal block. The amplitude of the signal
should be approximately the same (0.5 V) as the input signal, and the
same frequency.
g. If the output from the preamplifier is correct:
• Inspect the cable for breaks and cuts.
• Verify that the remote cable is correctly connected to the junction box at
the flowmeter.
The remote cable is factory-terminated and sealed at the electronics
end. The cable cannot be removed or re-terminated at the electronics
end. If the cable was tampered with at the electronics end, this is likely
the root cause of the improperly working flowmeter. Replace the cable.
See Preparing the Remote Signal Cable, page 55.
h. If the flowmeter still has no output, proceed to Testing the Electronics
Module, page 178.
Testing the Electronics Module

Refer to Replacing the Electronics Module, page 184 for detailed instructions on
removing and replacing the electronics module.
1. Remove the electronics compartment cover at the remote electronics.
2. Make sure there is no moisture in the electronics compartment. Moisture can be
the result of a loose cable/conduit connection, or a cover that was not fully
engaged. Buildup of corrosive moisture in this compartment may affect the
performance of the electronics.
3. Examine the electronics for exposure to excessive heat. The maximum
temperature the electronics can withstand is 80°C (176°F). Make sure the
installation is such that the electronics do not exceed this temperature.
178 MI 019-222
4. Test the output by putting the flowmeter in Test mode and setting the output
value.
– If the meter has no output in test mode, replace the module.
– If there is output from the meter, continue to the next step.
5. Remove the electronics module from the compartment by loosening the two
captured screws.
6. Check inside for broken or pinched wires, or connectors that are not engaged.
7. Check the voltage level at the cable end of the blue and red wires. The voltage
should be the same as was measured on the field terminals. If there is a
difference, the terminal block electronics assembly may have been damaged in a
severe transient, such as a lightning strike.
8. Remove the 4-wire connector from the back of the electronics module. This is the
signal input connector from the sensor to the electronics module. In place of this
connector, use a test connector (part number K0152KU).
9. Connect a frequency generator to the brown (+) and yellow (-) wires. Inject a
sinusoidal 0.5 V peak-to-peak signal that is in the vortex shedding frequency
range for the flowmeter. Look for a change in the output signal (in Frequency
mode). Change the input frequency over the expected vortex frequency range
and verify the output changes accordingly.
10. If there is still no output, replace the electronics module.
Output Suddenly Drops

The flowmeter output increases with flow, but when it approaches full scale, output
suddenly drops.
A sudden drop in output indicates an intrinsically safe loop that is using a passive
(unpowered) barrier. As the output increases, the voltage at the terminals drops below
the minimum.
Install an active, externally powered barrier, such as a Pepperl+Fuchs model
KFD0-SCS-Ex1.55.
Other Incorrect Output

Output Is Less Than Expected at All Flow Rates
• Verify that the upper range value (URV) is correct.
• Verify that the zero and span of the output are correct.
• Check for vibration levels that might influence the output signal. Refer to Setting
the LFCI, page 181.
• Check the flowmeter configuration to verify that the fluid flowing density is entered
correctly. Incorrect configuration can result in band pass filters being set to
improper values, with in-band signals being adversely affected.
• Check the load resistance.
• In the test mode, verify that the output at the receivers is correct.
MI 019-222 179
Output Is Less Than Expected at Low Flow Rates

If the problem appears only at low flow rates, there may be a pulsating flow condition,
resulting in missed pulses when the fluid velocity is very low.
the LFCI, page 181.
Output Is Constant When Flow Is Increasing or Decreasing

This condition may result from an in-band noise source overriding the vortex signal.
Check the LFCI setting procedure (refer to Setting the LFCI, page 181). Verify that the
URV is in line with the actual measurement range.
Output Is Greater Than Expected

the LFCI, page 181.
• Verify that the flowmeter is not in a failsafe mode, where full-scale output has
been configured as the failsafe output condition.
• Verify that the URV is correctly configured.
Incorrect Pulse Output Value

1. Verify the configuration of the pulse output:
• Raw Pulse: The raw vortex shedding frequency.
• Frequency Mode: Verify that the pulse is configured to the correct full range
value of 10 Hz, 100 Hz, or 1000 Hz.
• Pulse Mode: Verify that Pulse Output, Pulse Mode is properly defined.
2. If pulse output is configured for Frequency Mode, set the output frequency in the
test mode and verify the correct value.
180 MI 019-222
Setting the LFCI

Take these steps to set the Low-Flow Cut-In (LFCI).
1. To determine the magnitude of any false excitation, set damping to 0 seconds.
2. Make sure there is a no-flow condition. Preferably, block valves should be closed.
(Control valves can leak when closed, resulting in some flow that the flowmeter
can detect.)
3. Increase the LFCI setting by one level and observe the signal output. Increase
the LFCI again until there is no false signal.
Alternatively, you can use the automatic LFCI selection function (1Cal/Tst >
2 Calib > 3CalLFCI). When this command is executed, the flowmeter starts at the
most sensitive LFCI setting. If a false signal is detected within a fixed period, the
LFCI increases to the next level, and so on until a level is reached where there is
no false signal. See Automatic LFCI Selection, page 97.
4. If damping was changed to 0 seconds, restore it to the desired level.
5. If you changed the LFCI level, make sure controllers and receivers can
accommodate the increased LFCI setting. Output remains at 4 mA from zero flow
until this flow rate is reached.
Troubleshooting the Temperature Sensor

The RTD temperature sensor is integral to the vortex sensor in the flowmeter. To
troubleshoot the temperature measurement, take these steps:
1. Make sure the model code is entered correctly.
2. Check the sensor wiring.
3. Check the resistance of the RTD for a nominal value of 1,000 Ω.
4. Replace the vortex sensor.
MI 019-222 181
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Maintenance
Maintenance
Process Fluid Warnings
WARNING
HAZARD OF ESCAPING CHEMICALS
If process containing parts are to be disassembled:
• Make sure that process fluid is not under pressure or at high temperature.
• Take proper precautions concerning leakage or spillage of any toxic or otherwise
dangerous fluid. Follow any Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or Safety Data
Sheet (SDS) recommendations.
equipment damage.
WARNING
HAZARD OF CORROSION
The flowmeters are built using materials that are corrosion resistant to a wide
variety of fluids. However, with aggressive fluids, a potential exists for corrosive
failure. Therefore, verify the material compatibility with the NACE guidelines and/or
user knowledge of the flowmeter material compatibility with the process fluid at
operating conditions.
equipment damage.
CAUTION
RISK OF PERSONAL AND PROPERTY DAMAGE
Personnel involved in the maintenance of vortex flowmeters must be trained and
qualified in the use of the equipment required, and in the removal and replacement
of the flowmeter in the piping. They must also be qualified for the routine
maintenance of the flowmeter’s components.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
NOTICE
Components in your flowmeter are ESD-sensitive, and thus are susceptible to
damage resulting from electrostatic discharge. When performing maintenance in
the electronics compartment or remote junction box, or when working with the
housing cover removed, ground yourself with a conductive wrist strap or stand on
an ESD mat.
182 MI 019-222
Maintenance Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Maintenance Overview
The operation of the Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters consists of three basic functions:
• Generating and shedding vortices in the fluid stream
• Sensing vortices
• Amplifying, conditioning, and processing the signal from the vortex sensor
If you suspect a malfunction of the flowmeter, you can usually isolate the cause to one
of these functions.
Vortex Generation and Shedding

Vortex generation and shedding can be degraded or destroyed by disturbances in the
upstream flow, the nature of the flowing fluid, or (rarely) by damage to the vortex
shedding element. Flow disturbances can be created by gaskets protruding into the
flowing stream; by some form of partial blockage in the upstream piping; by the piping
configuration; or by the existence of two-phase flow.
Should the vortex shedding element become heavily caked, coated, or physically
damaged to the extent that its basic shape or dimensions are changed, the vortex
shedding process can be impaired.
NOTE: The length of straight, unobstructed upstream piping is important. Refer to
Effects of Piping on Flowmeter Performance, page 35.
Vortex Sensing
The Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters employ two basic types of sensors: standard
temperature range, and extended temperature range.
• The standard temperature range sensor can be filled with Fluorolube for
applications with process temperature limits of -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), or
with silicone oil for applications with process temperature limits of -20 and +200°
C (0 and 400°F).
• The sanitary flowmeter sensor is filled with NEOBEE® M-20 fluid for applications
with process temperature limits of -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F).
The standard temperature range sensor consists of a piezoelectric bimorph
crystal that is sealed inside a liquid-filled capsule having two diaphragms on
opposing sides. The vortex shedding process creates an alternating differential
pressure across the capsule. The pressure is transmitted to the crystal via the
diaphragms and fill fluid.
• The extended temperature range sensor is an unfilled sensor for applications up
to 371°C (700°F).
The extended temperature range sensor consists of two piezoelectric crystals
sealed inside a capsule having two process diaphragms, on opposing sides,
connected internally by a mechanical shuttle. The vortex shedding process
creates an alternating differential pressure across the capsule. The pressure is
transmitted to the crystals via the diaphragm-shuttle mechanism.
The alternating force acting on the crystals causes them to develop a pulsed
voltage with a frequency equal to the vortex shedding frequency. Damage to the
sealing diaphragms, or other physical damage, can cause the sensors to operate
improperly.
MI 019-222 183
Replacing the Electronics Module

The electronics module is located in the flowmeter housing, opposite the side with the
retention clip. On the back of the electronics module (and on its side, if your flowmeter
has an RTD) are several connectors:
Table 67 - Connectors on the Electronics Module
Number of Pins Color36 Description
Red (R) Loop +

2
to terminal block Blue (B) Loop –
Yellow (Y) Pulse Out +

3
to terminal block Green (G) Pulse Out –
With Preamplifier37 Without Preamplifier38
Blue (B) Preamp Out + Sensor +

4
Red (R) Preamp Power + n/a
to potted neck module
Orange (O) Preamp Power – n/a
Yellow (Y) Preamp Out – Sensor –
4 (on side)
Gray Temperature Sensor Ribbon Cable (if applicable)
to potted neck module
NOTICE
The replacement part is shipped in a protective antistatic bag. Do not remove the
part from this bag until you are ready to install it. This helps prevent damage due to
accidental electrostatic discharge.
Removing the Electronics Module

1. Shut off power to the flowmeter.
2. If the flowmeter electronics compartment has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock
screw into the housing to unlock the cover.
3. Remove the cover from the electronics compartment. The electronics
compartment is the side with the optional display. If you do not have an optional
display, the electronics compartment is to the left of the ground symbol on the
outside of the housing.
If you cannot remove the cover by hand, insert a flat bar in the cover slot.
36. On more recent models, the wires or cables are black. However, the connectors are designed to aid in placing the connectors in the correct
blocks and in the correct orientation.
37. Integrally mounted flowmeters with extended temperature range sensors have preamplifiers. All flowmeters that are remotely mounted also
have preamplifiers.
38. Integrally mounted flowmeters with standard temperature range sensors do not have preamplifiers.
184 MI 019-222
4. If an optional display is mounted to the electronics module, remove it by

loosening the two mounting screws and unplugging the ribbon cable from the
front of the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
Figure 111 - Optional Display Connection
RIBBON CABLE
CONNECTOR
ELECTRONICS
MODULE
5. Loosen the two captive screws, one on each side of the electronics module.
6. Pull the electronics module out of the housing just far enough to be able to reach
the cable connectors on the back of the electronics module.
7. Disconnect the cables from the back (and side, if the flowmeter has a
temperature sensor) of the electronics module.
8. Remove the electronics module from the housing.
MI 019-222 185
Installing the Electronics Module

1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the electronics module, if you have
not done so already. Refer to Removing the Electronics Module, page 184.
2. Remove the new electronics module from its protective bag.
3. Connect the cables to the terminal blocks on the back (and side, if applicable) of
the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
The connectors are designed to fit only in the correct terminal blocks, and in the
correct orientation on the electronics module.
Figure 112 - Electronics Module Connections
mA OUTPUT CONNECTOR
HART
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTOR ELECTRONICS
MODULE
PULSE
Y G
R+ P
O
W
B E
R
B Y
+
ELECTRONICS PREAMPLIFIER CABLE

MODULE OR SENSOR WIRES
4. Back the two electronics module captive screws out of the module until the
screws are captured by the plastic housing.
5. Rotating the electronics module no more than one full turn to take up the slack in
the wires, place the module in the housing over the two mounting holes.
6. Tighten the captive mounting screws, taking care that no wires are pinched under
the module.
7. If the electronics module was equipped with an optional display, reinstall the
display. Carefully fold the ribbon cable in the space between the display and the
electronics module so that it is not pinched. The display molding should rest firmly
against the module molding before you tighten the mounting screws. See
Optional Display Connection, page 185.
8. Configure the new electronics module to match the one that was just removed.
9. Replace the electronics compartment cover before operating the flowmeter. If the
housing has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock outwards from the housing to lock
the cover.
186 MI 019-222
Replacing the Potted Neck Module

All Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters have a printed wiring board located in a potted
module that resides in the neck of the instrument. This potted neck module functions
as a preamplifier, barrier, and/or interface depending on the model:
• In all Model 84C Vortex Flowmeters, it acts as an interface module.
• In an integrally-mounted flowmeter that has an extended temperature range
sensor, it acts as a preamplifier module.
• In a flowmeter that has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, it acts as
a barrier module. These flowmeters also have a PE ground in the electronics
housing. This ground must be disconnected as part of the replacement
procedure.
Refer to the following diagram when replacing the potted neck module.
Figure 113 - Potted Neck Module and Preamplifier Assembly — Integrally

Mounted
HOUSING
PE
GROUND
SCREW
RETENTION CLIP
POTTED NECK
MODULE
CUP
O-RING
NECK
CUP
MI 019-222 187
NOTICE
Removing the Potted Neck Module

Refer to Potted Neck Module and Preamplifier Assembly — Integrally Mounted, page
187.
1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the electronics module. Refer to
Removing the Electronics Module, page 184. (You do not need to disconnect the
display).
2. If the flowmeter has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, disconnect
the two green PE ground wires from the PE ground screw in the electronics
housing.
3. Remove the red lacquer from the anti-rotation screw.
4. Remove the anti-rotation screw completely, and slide the clip off of the housing.
Save the screw and clip.
5. Remove the housing by rotating it counterclockwise as viewed from the top.
6. Remove the two screws on the black potting cup. Save the screws.
7. Remove the module from the cup.
8. Flip the potting cup over to access the two 4-position terminal blocks.
9. Disconnect the wires from the 4-position terminal block(s) on the potted neck
module.
Installing the Potted Neck Module

1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the potted neck module, if you have
not done so already. Refer to Removing the Potted Neck Module, page 188.
2. Remove the new potted neck module from its protective bag.
3. Feed the wires from the sensor through the hole in the center of the neck
machining and connect them to the two 4-position terminal blocks on the potted
neck module, using the color codes on the wires and labels.
4. Install the potted neck module into its cup and secure it with the two screws
previously removed.
5. Feed the electronics cable, temperature sensor cable (if applicable), and PE
ground wires (if applicable) through the housing neck and into the electronics
compartment.
188 MI 019-222
6. Inspect the cup o-ring for damage. If the o-ring is damaged, replace it with the
appropriate o-ring.
WARNING
RISK OF ANSI/ISA NONCOMPLIANCE
Failure to reuse or install the proper cup o-ring for a CSA-labeled product
violates ANSI/ISA 12.27.01.
equipment damage.
7. Lubricate the o-ring with silicone lubricant (part number 0048130 or equivalent).
Verify that the o-ring is situated in the groove of the neck.
8. Screw the housing onto the cup. Hand-tighten until it bottoms. Do not over-
tighten.
9. If the flowmeter has explosionproof/flameproof electrical certification, reconnect
the two green PE ground wires to the PE ground screw in the electronics housing.
10. Insert the retention clip over the boss in the housing neck so that the hole in the
clip is aligned with the hole in the boss. Refer to the diagram.
RETENTION CLIP
ANTI-ROTATION
SCREW
11. Rotate the housing up to one full turn counterclockwise for optimum access.
12. Tighten the anti-rotation screw (to a torque of 7 lbf-in) and fill the screw recess
with red lacquer (part number X0180GS or equivalent).
13. Connect the cables to the terminal blocks on the back (and side, if applicable) of
the electronics module. Refer to the diagram.
The connectors are designed to fit only in the correct terminal blocks, and in the
correct orientation on the electronics module.
Figure 114 - Electronics Module Connections
mA OUTPUT CONNECTOR
HART
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTOR ELECTRONICS
MODULE
PULSE
Y G
R+ P
O
W
B E
R
B Y
+
ELECTRONICS PREAMPLIFIER CABLE

MODULE OR SENSOR WIRES
MI 019-222 189
14. Back the two electronics module captive screws out of the module until the
screws are captured by the plastic housing.
15. Rotating the electronics module no more than one full turn to take up the slack in
the wires, place the module in the housing over the two mounting holes.
16. Tighten the captive mounting screws, taking care that no wires are pinched under
the module.
17. Replace the electronics compartment cover before operating the flowmeter. If the
housing has a cover lock, rotate the cover lock outwards from the housing to lock
the cover.
Replacing the Preamplifier

All remotely mounted flowmeters have a preamplifier. For flowmeters with remotely
mounted electronics, use the procedures in this section.
Integrally mounted flowmeters with extended temperature range sensors also have a
preamplifier; however, this preamplifier is located on the potted neck module. Refer to
Replacing the Potted Neck Module, page 187 for instructions.
Integrally mounted flowmeters with standard temperature range do not have a
preamplifier.
Figure 115 - Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted
WIRE COVER
BRACKET
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR WIRES TEMPERATURE
(INPUT) SENSOR WIRES
(OUTPUT)
VORTEX
SENSOR WIRES VORTEX SENSOR
(INPUT) AND POWER WIRES
(OUTPUT)
TO
ELECTRONICS
HOUSING
SET SCREW
190 MI 019-222
NOTICE
Removing the Preamplifier

Refer to Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted, page 190.
1. Shut off power to the flowmeter.
2. Rotate the set screw into the junction box to unlock the cover. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the wire cover bracket. Save the screws.
4. Disconnect all of the wires from the front of the preamplifier module.
5. Remove the two screws securing the preamplifier. Save the screws.
6. Lift the preamplifier out of the junction box.
Installing the Preamplifier

Refer to Preamplifier Assembly — Remotely Mounted, page 190.
1. Turn off power to the flowmeter and remove the preamplifier, if you have not done
so already. Refer to Removing the Preamplifier, page 191.
2. Remove the new preamplifier from its protective bag. Be sure to install the correct
board:
• L0123HT — standard temperature
• L0123HV — extended temperature
3. Connect the yellow and brown sensor wires to the 2-position Y/B terminal block
on the neck board.
4. If the flowmeter has a temperature sensor, attach the ribbon cable to the R/R/N/N
terminal block on the neck board.
5. Connect the remaining wires to the 4-position terminal blocks in accordance with
the color coding shown on the labels.
6. Mount the new preamplifier in the junction box using the two screws from the old
preamplifier.
7. Verify that the wires are fully engaged in the connectors. Lightly tug each wire to
verify that it is firmly held in place by the connector, on the metal conductor and
not on the wire insulation. If any wires are not engaged, press the lever in the
connector, insert the bare conductor, and release the lever, checking again that
the wire is firmly clamped.
MI 019-222 191
8. Add the wire cover bracket and secure it with the screws you saved when you
removed it.
9. Replace the junction box cover. Rotate the set screw outwards from the junction
box to lock the cover before operating the flowmeter.
Replacing the Sensor

Always shut down the pipeline and empty it before you loosen the bonnet bolts.
If the flowmeter housing is in a vertical mounting position, you do not need to remove
the flowmeter from the pipeline in order to replace the sensor. However, the flowmeter
housing must be in a vertical mounting position so that the bonnet bolts can be
properly torqued. If the flowmeter housing is not mounted vertically, remove the
flowmeter from the line before performing a sensor replacement.
Replacing the sensor does not cause a shift in the K-factor. Therefore, the flowmeter
does not require recalibration.
Refer to MI 019-223 for sensor replacement procedures.
Replacing or Adding a Digital Display/Configurator

It may be necessary to replace the existing display or you may choose to add a
display to a flowmeter that does not have one installed.
Refer to MI 019-198 for instructions on replacing or adding a digital display/
configurator to the flowmeter.
• When replacing an existing display, use the M84/84C Replacement Kit (Part
number K0149GV).
• When adding a new display to a flowmeter that did not have one, use the M84/
84C Conversion Kit (Part number K0149GS).
192 MI 019-222
Model Code Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Model Code
These tables list all of the options, including other electronics versions, for the Model
84C Vortex Flowmeters.
Flanged Body Style

Table 68 - Model Code for 84CF Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
84C Vortex Flowmeter
Body Style
F Flanged
Nominal Line Size
008 DN15; 15 mm (3/4 in)
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
015 DN40; 40 mm (1 1/2 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
040 DN100; 100 mm (4 in)
060 DN150; 150 mm (6 in)
080 DN200; 200 mm (8 in)39
100 DN250; 250 mm (10 in)
120 DN300; 300 mm (12 in)
Electronics Version
-T HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output
-L Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA
-M Modbus Communication
Pulse Output
P Pulse Output Capability
Body, Shedder Bar, and Flange Material
ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar

R • 316 ss Flanges for Line Sizes 008 to 040
• 304 ss Flanges for Line Sizes 060 to 080
E Fabricated 304 ss Body and Shedder Bar, with 304 ss Flanges (Line Sizes 100 to 120)
316 ss with face-to-face lengths that are backwards compatible with Style A Model 84 Vortex Flowmeters40
Y • For Line Sizes 008 to 040, Cast 316 ss (CF8M) Body and Shedder Bar with 316 ss Flanges
• Line Sizes 060 to 120 already have backward-compatible face-to-face lengths
39. For Line Size 080 with End Connection F4, F5, T4, T5, D5, or B5, Optional Welding Certificate -X is included.
40. Selection Y is recommended only for replacement of Style A flowmeters that have lay-length differences greater than ±6.35 mm (1/4 inch).
MI 019-222 193
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Model Code
Table 68 - Model Code for 84CF Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
End Connections and Flange Pressure Rating
F1 ANSI Class 150 Raised Face

F4 ANSI Class 900 Raised Face (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
F5 ANSI Class 1500 Raised Face (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
T1 ANSI Class 150 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Size 008)
T2 ANSI Class 300 Ring-Type Joint
T3 ANSI Class 600 Ring-Type Joint
T4 ANSI Class 900 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
T5 ANSI Class 1500 Ring-Type Joint (not available with Line Sizes 100 and 120)
D1 PN16 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 040)
D2 PN25 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 060)
D3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove
D6 PN63 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 015)41
D7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove
D5 PN160 EN1092-1 Raised Face Type “D” Nut Groove (not available with Line Sizes 008, 100, and 120)
B1 PN16 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 040)
B2 PN25 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 060)
B3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B1
B6 PN63 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2 (not available with Line Sizes 008 to 015)42
B7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2
B5 PN160 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type B2 (not available with Line Sizes 008, 100, and 120)
C3 PN40 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type F
C7 PN100 EN1092-1 Raised Face Finish Type F
Single or Dual Measurement; Isolation Manifold
S Single Measurement; No Isolation Manifold
Multivariable Selection
N None
T Temperature Compensation up to 260°C (500°F)43
41. For Line Sizes 008, 010, and 015, select End Connection D7.
42. For Line Sizes 008, 010, and 015, select End Connection B7.
43. For Multivariable Selection T, pulse output is always enabled.
194 MI 019-222
Code Description
Sensor Fill, Temperature Range, and Material
Standard Temperature Range (with Fill Fluid)
D Fluorolube Fill, -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M44
F Fluorolube Fill, -20 and +93°C (0 and 200°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
R Silicone Fill, -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M44
S Silicone Fill, -20 and +200°C (0 and 400°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)
A Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M44 45
B Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M45
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M44 46 47
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M46 47
Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing
T Aluminum, Integral, Top-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections
V Aluminum, Integral, Top-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections
R Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections48
W Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections48
Local Digital Indicator/Configurator
N No Digital Indicator/Configurator
J Digital Indicator/Configurator
Electrical Certifications (refer to Electrical Certifications, page 29)49
AA ATEX Intrinsically Safe50
AD ATEX Flameproof
BA INMETRO Intrinsically Safe50
BD INMETRO Flameproof51
CA CSA Intrinsically Safe50
CD CSA Explosionproof
CN CSA Division 250
EA IECEx Intrinsically Safe50
ED IECEx Flameproof
FA FM Intrinsically Safe50
FD FM Explosionproof
FN FM Nonincendive50
KD KCs Flameproof
45. With Multivariable Selection T, the temperature element of the RTD is rated to 260°C (500°F). Use care with a Vortex high temperature
sensor, which is rated to a higher temperature.
46. Not available with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection T).
47. Includes Optional Welding Certificate -X.
48. For remote mounting, select a cable length with the Cable for Connecting to Remote-Mounted Electronics option.
49. For detailed information or status of testing laboratory approvals/certifications, contact Global Customer Support.
50. Not available with Modbus (Electronics Version -M).
MI 019-222 195
Code Description
NA NEPSI Intrinsically Safe52
ND NEPSI Flameproof53
RA EAC Intrinsically Safe52
RD EAC Flameproof53
YY CE mark only; PED controls and records
ZZ No CE mark; Do not install in European Union countries
Cable for Connecting to Remote-Mounted Electronics (Optional)
-B 6 m (20 ft) Cable
-D 9 m (30 ft) Cable
-E 12 m (40 ft) Cable
-G 15 m (50 ft) Cable
Certificates of Compliance/Conformance (Optional)
-L Standard Certificate of Compliance
-M Material Certification of Process Wetted Metal (Conforms to EN 10204 Type 3.1 Certificate)
-Q Process Wetted Parts Comply with NACE Standards MR-0175-2003 and MR-0103-2007
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT)
-P Hawke Cable Gland (available only with Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)
-R PG11 Cable Gland, Trumpet-Shaped (available only with Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)
Welding Certificate (Optional) (select only one)
-F Welding Certified to Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
Welding Certified to Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, and Radiographic (X-Ray) Examination of
-X
Welds54
Tamper-Resistant Options
-A Tamper-Resistant Sealing for Housing and Covers
-S Tamper-Resistant Cover over Bonnet Bolts
Miscellaneous Optional Selections
Cleaning of Process Wetted Parts for Oxygen/Chlorine Service per Compressed Gas Association’s CGA G-4.1 and
-H
ASTM G9355
-J Gold-Plated Sensor
-N Calibration and Pressure Test Certified Copy
Adapter for 1/2–14 NPT Conduit (available only with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing code R, and with
-T Electrical Certifications YY and ZZ)

54. This option is already included with: Line Size 080 with End Connection F4, F5, T4, T5, D5, or B5; and with Sensor Fill, Temperature Range,
and Material codes E and G.
55. Available only with sensors that have Fluorolube fill. Not available with unfilled sensors or sensors that have silicone fill.
196 MI 019-222
Wafer Body Style

Table 69 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
W Wafer
Nominal Line Size
008 DN15; 15 mm (3/4 in)
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
015 DN40; 40 mm (1 1/2 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
040 DN100; 100 mm (4 in)
060 DN150; 150 mm (6 in)
080 DN200; 200 mm (8 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
Body and Shedder Bar Material
R ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar
H ASTM A494-CW2M (Nickel Alloy) Body and Shedder Bar56 (Line Sizes 008 to 040)
Mounting and Centering System
Centering for:
• ANSI Class 150, 300, and 600 Flanges (Line Sizes 008 to 040)
W1 • PN16 Flanges (Line Sizes 010 to 030)
• PN40 Flanges (Line Sizes 010 to 030, 060, and 080)
• PN63 and PN100 Flanges (All Line Sizes)
W3 Centering for ANSI Class 600 Flanges (Line Sizes 060 to 080)
W4 Centering for PN16 Flanges (Line Sizes 040 to 080)
W5 Centering for PN40 Flanges (Line Size 040)
W9 Centering for PN16 and PN40 Flanges (Line Size 008)
MI 019-222 197
Table 69 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
N None
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)59
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M58
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M
AD ATEX Flameproof
CN CSA Division 262
ED IECEx Flameproof

198 MI 019-222
Table 69 - Model Code for 84CW Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
KD KCs Flameproof
RD EAC Flameproof65
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT) (Optional)
-H
ASTM G9366

MI 019-222 199
NPT (Threaded) Body Style

Table 70 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
N NPT (Male) Threaded Connection
Nominal Line Size
010 DN25; 25 mm (1 in)
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
R ASTM A351-CF8M (Cast 316 ss) Body and Shedder Bar
End Connections and Pressure Rating
NPT Male Connection and:

V4 • ANSI Class 1500 Pressure Rating (Line Size 010)
• ANSI Class 900 Pressure Rating (Line Size 020)
N None

200 MI 019-222
Table 70 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
Extended Temperature Range (No Fill Fluid)
A Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M69 70
B Unfilled, 149 and 371°C (300 and 700°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M70
E Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Nickel Alloy CW2M69 71
G Unfilled, 149 and 427°C (300 and 800°F), Cast Stainless Steel CF3M71
AD ATEX Flameproof
CN CSA Division 274
ED IECEx Flameproof
KD KCs Flameproof75
RD EAC Flameproof75
71. Not available with temperature compensation (Multivariable Selection T).
MI 019-222 201
Table 70 - Model Code for 84CN Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
Cable Connectors — with Mounting and Conduit Openings for Electronics Housing codes T and R only (1/2 NPT) (Optional)
-H
ASTM G9376
202 MI 019-222
Sanitary Body Style

Table 71 - Model Code for 84CS Flowmeters
Code Description
Model
Body Style
S Sanitary
Nominal Line Size
020 DN50; 50 mm (2 in)
030 DN80; 80 mm (3 in)
Electronics Version
Pulse Output
R 316/316L ss Tubing, 316L ss Shedder
End Connections
C0 3-A I-Line Fitting Mates With (Cherry-Burrell 15 WI or equivalent)
T0 3-A Fitting Mates With (Tri-Clover or equivalent)
None
N (no temperature compensation)
C Neobee M-20 Fill, -20 and +177°C (0 and 350°F)
R Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with 1/2 NPT Conduit Connections
W Aluminum, Remote-Mounted, with M20 Conduit Connections
AD ATEX Flameproof
MI 019-222 203
Table 71 - Model Code for 84CS Flowmeters (Continued)
Code Description
ED IECEx Flameproof
KD KCs Flameproof80
RD EAC Flameproof80

204 MI 019-222
Nominal Dimensions Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Nominal Dimensions
For dimensional information specific to your sales order, contact your sales
representative to order a Certified Dimensional Print (CDP).
mm
All dimensions in diagrams are shown in millimeters over inches ( in ).
Dimensions for 84C Flanged Body Flowmeters

Figure 116 - Flanged Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics
Housing
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
CONDUIT
CONNECTION EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
224 STANDARD TEMP.
EXTERNAL 8.8
OR
GROUND
315 EXTENDED TEMP.
12.4
A B
FLOWMETER
BODY FLANGE
DIMENSION IN
ACCORDANCE WITH
EN 1092-1 AND ANSI B16.5 C
Figure 117 - Flanged Body Flowmeter with Junction Box

112
4.4
STANDARD TEMP. 205

OR 8.0
EXTENDED TEMP. 296
11.6
D
B A
MI 019-222 205
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Nominal Dimensions
Table 72 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code R or E
Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension C81

Nominal Dimension
Line Size Type A (OD) B (ID) RF Flange RTJ Flange D
Class 150 3.88 in 6.56 in —
Class 300 6.94 in 7.32 in

4.62 in
008 Class 600 0.74 in 7.44 in 7.44 in 1.82 in
Class 900
5.12 in 8.44 in 8.44 in
Class 1500
Class 150 4.25 in 6.80 in 7.18 in
Class 300 7.32 in 7.70 in
4.88 in
010 Class 600 0.96 in 7.82 in 7.82 in 1.93 in
Class 900
5.88 in 8.70 in 8.70 in
Class 1500
Class 150 5.00 in 7.32 in 7.70 in
Class 300 7.82 in 8.20 in
6.12 in
015 Class 600 1.50 in 8.44 in 8.44 in 2.20 in
Class 900
7.00 in 9.44 in 9.44 in
Class 1500
Class 150 6.00 in 7.75 in 8.13 in
Class 300 8.25 in 8.75 in
6.50 in 1.94 in 2.32 in
020 Class 600 9.01 in 9.13 in
Class 900
8.50 in 11.25 in 11.37 in
Class 1500 1.69 in 2.20 in
Class 150 7.50 in 8.88 in 9.26 in
Class 300 9.62 in 10.12 in
8.25 in 2.87 in 2.75 in
030 Class 600 10.38 in 10.50 in
Class 900 9.50 in 11.88 in 12.00 in
Class 1500 10.50 in 2.63 in 13.12 in 13.25 in 2.62 in
Class 150 9.00 in 9.62 in 10.00 in
Class 300 10.00 in 10.38 in 10.88 in
3.83 in
040 Class 600 10.75 in 12.12 in 12.24 in 3.35 in
Class 900 11.50 in 13.12 in 13.24 in
Class 1500 12.25 in 3.44 in 13.88 in 14.00 in
Class 150 11.00 in 12.00 in 12.38 in
Class 300 12.50 in 5.76 in 12.76 in 13.26 in
060 Class 600 14.00 in 14.74 in 14.86 in 4.42 in
Class 900 15.00 in 16.50 in 16.62 in
5.19 in
Class 1500 15.50 in 19.00 in 19.25 in
81. For line sizes 008 through 010, the overall length (dimension C) is ±6.4 mm (±0.250 in). For line size 120, the overall length is ±8.9 mm
(±0.350 in).
206 MI 019-222
Table 72 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code R or E

(Continued)
Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension C82

Nominal Dimension
Line Size Type A (OD) B (ID) RF Flange RTJ Flange D
Class 150 13.50 in 15.00 in 15.38 in

Class 300 15.00 in 7.63 in 15.75 in 16.26 in
080 Class 600 16.50 in 18.00 in 18.12 in 5.47 in
Class 900 18.50 in 20.26 in 20.38 in
6.81 in
Class 1500 19.00 in 24.26 in 24.64 in
Class 150 16.00 in 15.00 in 15.38 in
100 Class 300 17.50 in 9.56 in 16.24 in 16.74 in 6.55 in
Class 600 20.00 in 19.5 in 19.62 in
Class 150 19.00 in 17.00 in 17.38 in
120 Class 300 20.50 in 11.37 in 18.24 in 18.24 in 7.55 in
Class 600 22.00 in 20.74 in 20.76 in
Table 73 - Flanged Body, with DIN Flanges and Material Code R or E
Nominal Line Dimension Dimension Dimension

Flange Type Dimension D
Size A (OD) B (ID) C82
PN 4083 95 mm 138 mm
008 19 mm 46 mm
PN 100 105 mm 152 mm
PN 4083 115 mm 142 mm
010 PN 100 24.31 mm 49 mm
140 mm 178 mm
PN 160
PN 4083 150 mm 152 mm
015 PN 100 38.10 mm 186 mm 56 mm
170 mm
PN 160 190 mm
PN 4083 165 mm 166 mm
PN 63 180 mm 194 mm
020 49 mm 59 mm
PN 100 206 mm
195 mm
PN 160 220 mm
PN 4083 200 mm 202 mm
PN 63 215 mm 230 mm
030 73 mm 70 mm
PN 100 242 mm
230 mm
PN 160 258 mm
PN 4083 235 mm 222 mm
PN 63 250 mm 248 mm
040 97 mm 85 mm
PN 100 272 mm
265 mm
PN 160 292 mm
(±0.350 in).
83. May be used with a PN 25 mating flange.
MI 019-222 207
Table 73 - Flanged Body, with DIN Flanges and Material Code R or E (Continued)
Nominal Line Dimension Dimension Dimension

Flange Type Dimension D
Size A (OD) B (ID) C84
PN 16 285 mm 237 mm
PN 4085 300 mm 277 mm
146 mm
060 PN 63 345 mm 317 mm 112 mm
PN 100 357 mm
355 mm
PN 160 132 mm 383 mm
PN 16 340 mm 302 mm
PN 25 360 mm 338 mm
PN 40 375 mm 194 mm 354 mm
080 139 mm
PN 63 415 mm 398 mm
PN 100 438 mm
430 mm
PN 160 173 mm 458 mm
PN 16 405 mm 318 mm
PN 25 425 mm 354 mm
100 PN 40 450 mm 243 mm 388 mm 166 mm
PN 63 470 mm 428 mm
PN 100 505 mm 492 mm
PN 16 460 mm 359 mm
PN 25 485 mm 387 mm
120 PN 40 515 mm 289 mm 433 mm 192 mm
PN 63 530 mm 483 mm
PN 100 585 mm 543 mm
Table 74 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code Y (Backward
Compatible with Style A)
Nominal Line Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension

Rating86 A (OD) B (ID) Dimension D
Size C87
Class 150 3.88 in

6.00 in
008 Class 300 0.74 in 1.82 in
4.62 in
Class 600 6.50 in
Class 150 4.25 in
6.50 in
010 Class 300 0.96 in 1.93 in
4.88 in
Class 600 7.00 in
Class 150 5.00 in
7.25 in
015 Class 300 1.50 in 2.20 in
6.12 in
Class 600 7.88 in
Class 300 7.75 in
020 6.50 in 1.94 in 2.32 in
Class 600 8.50 in
(±0.350 in).
85. May be used with a PN 25 mating flange.
86. For ANSI flanges, material code Y offers face-to-face lengths that are backward compatible with the Style A vortex flowmeters model code
selection S. Use material code Y when replacing a Model 84F Style A meter.
87. Overall length (C) is ±0.250 in (±6.4 mm).
208 MI 019-222
Table 74 - Flanged Body, with ANSI Flanges and Material Code Y (Backward
Compatible with Style A) (Continued)
Nominal Line Flange Dimension Dimension Dimension

Rating88 A (OD) B (ID) Dimension D
Size C89
Class 300 8.75 in

030 8.25 in 2.87 in 2.75 in
Class 600 9.50 in
Class 300 10.00 in 9.50 in
040 3.83 in 3.35 in
Class 600 10.75 in 10.50 in
Figure 118 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CF

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
FOR SURFACE OR BRACKET FOR
PIPE MOUNTING; SURFACE OR
USE BRACKET PIPE MOUNTING
AS TEMPLATE 353
WHEN SURFACE 13.9 CABLE TO U-BOLT SHOWN
MOUNTING FLOWTUBE FOR MOUNTING
ASSEMBLY VERTICAL DN 50
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
69.9 HORIZONTAL PIPE
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
NOTE: WHEN THE BRACKET IS USED FOR WALL MOUNTING, REPLACE THE U-BOLT WITH TWO
OR FOUR 0.375 in BOLTS LONG ENOUGH TO PASS THROUGH THE BRACKET AND SURFACE.
88. For ANSI flanges, material code Y offers face-to-face lengths that are backward compatible with the Style A vortex flowmeters model code
selection S. Use material code Y when replacing a Model 84F Style A meter.
89. Overall length (C) is ±0.250 in (±6.4 mm).
MI 019-222 209
Dimensions for 84C Wafer Body Flowmeters

Figure 119 - Wafer Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics Housing
CONDUIT
96 CONNECTION 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
CONDUIT EXTENDED
CONNECTION COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
186 STANDARD TEMP.

7.3 EXTERNAL
OR
277 EXTENDED TEMP. GROUND
10.9
B A
Figure 120 - Wafer Body Flowmeter with Junction Box
112
4.4
186 STANDARD TEMP.

7.3
OR
277 EXTENDED TEMP.
10.9
D
A B
Table 75 - Wafer Body Dimensions
Nominal Line Dimension A Dimension B

(OD) (ID)91 Dimension C Dimension D
Size90
57.2 mm 18.8 mm 79.5 mm 36.6 mm

008 (2.25 in) (0.74 in) (3.13 in) (1.44 in)
66.8 mm 24.3 mm 79.5 mm 39.4 mm

010 (2.63 in) (0.96 in) (3.13 in) (1.55 in)
90. Flowmeter body fits between ANSI Class 150, 300, or 600 raised face flanges, or between PN 16, 40, 63, or 100 flanges.
91. Bore equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.
210 MI 019-222
Table 75 - Wafer Body Dimensions (Continued)
Nominal Line Dimension A Dimension B

(OD) (ID)93 Dimension C Dimension D
Size92
85.9 mm 38.1 mm 79.5 mm 46.2 mm

015 (3.38 in) (1.50 in) (3.13 in) (1.82 in)
104.6 mm 49.2 mm 79.5 mm 49.3 mm

020 (4.12 in) (1.94 in) (3.13 in) (1.94 in)
136.7 mm 72.9 mm 95.3 mm 60.2 mm

030 (5.38 in) (2.87 in) (3.75 in) (2.37 in)
174.5 mm 96.7 mm 120.7 mm 73.9 mm

040 (6.87 in) (3.81 in) (4.75 in) (2.91 in)
222.3 mm 147.3 mm 177.8 mm 98.0 mm

060 (8.75 in) (5.80 in) (7.00 in) (3.86 in)
279.4 mm 193.0 mm 228.6 mm 122.9 mm

080 (11.00 in) (7.60 in) (9.00 in) (4.84 in)
Figure 121 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CW

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
92. Flowmeter body fits between ANSI Class 150, 300, or 600 raised face flanges, or between PN 16, 40, 63, or 100 flanges.
93. Bore equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.
MI 019-222 211
Dimensions for 84C NPT Body Flowmeters

Figure 122 - NPT Body Flowmeter with Integrally Mounted Electronics Housing
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
Figure 123 - NPT Body Flowmeter with Junction Box
112
4.4
STANDARD TEMP. 205

8.0
OR
296
EXTENDED TEMP. 11.6
212 MI 019-222
Table 76 - NPT Body Dimensions
Dimension A
Nominal Line Dimension B (ID)
Standard Extended Dimension C
Size
Temperature Temperature
010 251 mm (9.9 in) 342 mm (13.5 in) 24.3 mm (0.96 in) 101.6 mm (4.0 in)
020 277 mm (10.9 in) 368 mm (14.5 in) 49.2 mm (1.94 in) 152.4 mm (6.0 in)
Figure 124 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CN

188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
MI 019-222 213
Dimensions for 84C Sanitary Flowmeters

Figure 125 - Remotely Mounted Electronics Housing for 84CS
188
7.4
96 30 124
3.8 1.2 4.9
EXTENDED
COVER FOR
LOCAL DISPLAY
172.7
10.2 mm (0.40 in) 6.8
HOLES, SIX PLACES,
AS TEMPLATE 353
OR 2 in PIPE; FOR
2.75 46 MOUNTING,
1.8 ROTATE U-BOLT
90 DEGREES
69.9
2.75
99
3.9
Figure 126 - Interconnecting Cable to Electronics Housing for 84CS
INTERCONNECTING CABLE
TO ELECTRONICS HOUSING END CONNECTION
4.5 m (15 ft) CONFIGURATION AND
DIMENSIONS IN
SEPARATE TABLE
FLOWMETER
BODY
I.D. O.D.
C0, T0
Table 77 - Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions
Flowmeter Body Dimensions
End Connections95
Nominal Line Size I.D.94 O.D. C0 T0
020 47.50 mm (1.87 in) 50.8 mm (2.0 in) 155 mm (6.1 in) 127 mm (5.0 in)
030 72.90 mm (2.87 in) 76.2 mm (3.0 in) 213 mm (8.4 in) 178 mm (7.0 in)
94. Equivalent to Schedule 80 pipe.

95. Tube length for each end connection.
214 MI 019-222
Figure 127 - End Connection for 84CS
3A I-LINE FITTING (CODE C0) 3-A TRI-CLOVER FITTING (CODE T0)
O.D.* I.D.* D O.D.* I.D.* E D
12.7
W
0.50
C0* T0*
NOTE: Refer to Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions, page 214 for values of
O.D., I.D., and tube lengths for connections C0 and T0.
Table 78 - Sanitary Flowmeter End Connection Dimensions
End Connection Dimensions96

Code C0 Code T0
Nominal Line Size D W D E
020 67.06 mm (2.64 in) 26.19 mm (1.03 in) 64.0 mm (2.52 in) 56.4 mm (2.22 in)
030 98.3 mm (3.87 in) 30.96 mm (1.22 in) 90.9 mm (3.58 in) 83.3 mm (3.28 in)
96. See the Sanitary Flowmeter Body Dimensions, page 214 for dimensions for the O.D., End Connections, and I.D.
MI 019-222 215
Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power Parts List
Parts List
Electronics Housing
The electronics housing can be integrally mounted to the flowtube, or remotely
mounted to a bracket. See Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 219 for remote
mounting parts and configuration.
Figure 128 - Electronics Housing Assembly
FIELD WIRING END TERMINAL

BLOCK
11 7 SOLID COVER
6 3
4 1
10
23
24
7 22
3
DATA PLATE ENCIRCLES NECK 2
OF ELECTRONICS HOUSING
ELECTRONICS END
8 POWER WIRES TO 9
TERMINAL BLOCK
15
EXTENDED LENGTH
WINDOW COVER WHEN
INDICATOR/CONFIGURATOR
(ITEM 9) IS SELECTED
3
1
CONNECTOR
16 5 FOR CABLE
FROM INDICATOR/
CONFIGURATOR
12 4
21 19
20 STANDARD LENGTH SOLID
COVER WHEN INDICATOR/
CONFIGURATOR (ITEM 9)
IS NOT SELECTED
3 14 18
5
13
17
216 MI 019-222
Parts List Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power
Table 79 - Parts for Electronics Housing Assembly
Item Part No. Qty. Part Name
1 D0162AP 2 Cover, Aluminum; No Indicator/Configurator
2 K0147YA 1 Cover, Aluminum; with Window; used when Indicator/

Configurator is selected, replaces Item 1 on electronics end
3 X0114AT A/R Grease, 14 ounce can
4 X0201FC 2 O-Ring, Cover
5 Below 1 Electronics Module Assembly
K0168GF HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output (Version -T)
K0168RS Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA

(Version -L)
D0219DB Modbus Communication (Version -M)
6 Below 1 Terminal Block Assembly - with Pulse Output (includes 4

mounting screws)
K0168QY HART Communication or Low Power, Non-Explosionproof

Installations
K0168QZ HART Communication or Low Power, Flameproof/
Explosionproof Installations
K0171BU Modbus Communication

7 D0162VJ 2 Screw Assembly, Plated ss, 0.164-32 x 0.375
8 B1270KE A/R Sealant, Thread
9 K0149GV 1 Digital Indicator/Configurator Replacement Kit (includes

indicator/configurator, label, screws, and instructions)
10 D0162WM 2 Screw, Cover Lock, 0.164-3297
11 X0144KR 1 O-Ring, Terminal Block
12 Potted Cup Assembly Module; see Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers, page 218
13 X0144KW 1 O-Ring, Housing Neck
14 K0168GG 1 Cup Housing Neck, Machining
15 Below 1 Plug, Pipe
B0139CA 1/2 NPT; Aluminum; with Housing Codes T and R
D0179FK M20; ss; with Housing Codes V and W
WARNING
RISK OF MOISTURE INGRESS
To maintain IP66 (IEC 60529) and NEMA Type 4X protection, the unused conduit
opening must be closed with a metal plug. In addition, the threaded housing
covers must be properly installed.
equipment damage.
16 X0174GF 2 Screw, Panhead; Cross Recessed; ss; M4 x 0.7 x 28 mm
17 K0148TQ 1 Nut, Jam; Hexhead; ss; 0.500-14
97. Cover lock screws are provided with ATEX/IECEx/NEPSI flameproof electrical certifications. They are used to help prevent rotation of the
housing covers. To remove a cover, turn the screw clockwise until the screw clears the cover groove; then remove the cover. To put the cover
back in place, screw the cover on, and then turn the screw counterclockwise until it engages the cover groove.
MI 019-222 217
Table 79 - Parts for Electronics Housing Assembly (Continued)
18 K0152KU 1 Harness, Test; Accessory98
19 K0152JV 1 Molding, PE Ground
20 K0152JX 1 Screw Assembly, PE Ground; ss; 0.164-32 x 0.315
21 X0133VN 1 Screw, Socket Head; ss; 0.132-32 x 0.437
22 D0197PS 1 Retention Clip
23 X0174EK 1 Button Head Screw

24 X0180GS 1 Red Lacquer
Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers

Table 80 - With Flameproof or Explosionproof Agency Certification
Multivariable Selection: No Temperature Compensation (N) Temperature Compensation (T)
Sensor Temperature Range: Standard Extended Standard Extended
Integrally Mounted K0168MW99 K0168MX K0168MW K0168MX

Electronics
Housing:
Remotely Mounted K0171CB K0168QD
Table 81 - With Non-Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification
Multivariable Selection: No Temperature Compensation (N) Temperature Compensation (T)
Sensor Temperature Range: Standard Extended Standard Extended
Integrally Mounted K0168GJ99 K0168HF K0168GJ K0168HF

Electronics
Housing:
Remotely Mounted K0168QB
98. The test harness provides a means for inputting a test frequency using a frequency generator, for users who require a test input for validation.
99. The 84CS (Sanitary) only uses Potted Cup Assembly Part Number K0168MW (with Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification) and
K0168GJ (with Non-Flameproof/Explosionproof Agency Certification).
218 MI 019-222
Junction Box and Remote Mounting

Figure 129 - Junction Box and Remote Mounting for Flanged, Wafer, and NPT
Body Flowmeter
1
6
26 ITEM 11 OPTIONAL CONDUIT

CONNECTION (OPTION -T) IS
25 REQUIRED ON BOTH ENDS
OF CABLE ASSEMBLY WHEN
CONDUIT IS USED IN THE
INSTALLATION
12 12
8 9 11 ELECTRONICS HOUSING
3 10
ASSEMBLY PARTS
5 21
2
7
1
EXTENDED (HIGH)
24
TEMPERATURE
RANGE ASSEMBLY
SHOWN
18
23
19
BONNET ASSEMBLY
ATTACHES TO
FLOWTUBE BODY
2 20
13 15
16
14
POTTED END
OF CABLE
ASSEMBLY
22
OPTIONAL CONDUIT
CONNECTION (OPTION -T)
12 11
17
MI 019-222 219
Table 82 - Parts for Junction Box and Remote Mounting
1 K0152GB 1 Connection Head Assembly (Junction Box); for explosionproof;

ss. Includes housing, cover, cover lock, and cover o-ring
2 X0114AT A/R Grease, 14 ounce can
3 Below 1 Preamplifier Assembly
D0159SX Standard Temperature Remote
D0159SZ Extended Temperature Remote
4 X0173UN 2 Screw, Panhead; Cross-recessed; ss; M4 x 0.7 x 9 mm
5 K0168MT 2 Standoff, hexagonal head; ss; M4 x 10 mm
6 D0179EG 1 O-Ring, Cover; included in Item 1 but also available separately
7 Below 1 Cable Assembly, Remote Housing (includes Connector

Assembly)100
K0168HB 20 ft (6 m) long
K0168HC 30 ft (9 m) long
K0168HD 40 ft (12 m) long
K0168HE 50 ft (15 m) long
8 K0168RA 1 Adapter; 1.125 Hexhead; ss; 1/2 NPT and 0.500-20
9 K0168MU 1 Bushing, silicone rubber; 0.275 in long; 0.280 ID.
10 K0168MZ 1 Nut, Knurled; ss; 0.542 in long; 0.5-20
11 K0149LE 2 Connector, Conduit; Option -T (required when conduit is used)
12 B1270KE A/R Sealant, Thread
13 Housing; see Electronics Housing, page 216
14 K0148TQ 1 Nut, Jam; 1.259 Hexhead; ss; 0.500-20
15 K0149HR 1 Bracket Assembly, Mounting; painted steel
16 D0114SM 1 U-Bolt, 0.312-18; plated steel
17 0011962 2 Nut, 0.312-18; plated steel
18 X0143SL 1 Washer, Lock; Extended Tooth; ss; 0.875
19 K0168RY 1 Wire Cover Bracket

20 K0201QE 2 Standoff, Hex
100. The cable assembly is potted on the electronics housing end. The opposite end is assembled to the connection head assembly using a
bushing and a knurled nut. If a conduit is used during installation, a conduit connector is used at each end of the cable assembly. See
Remotely Mounted Electronics, page 55.
220 MI 019-222
Figure 130 - Remote Mounting for Sanitary Body Flowmeter

ELECTRONICS HOUSING
ASSEMBLY PARTS
4 3
6 7
9
10
8 11
12
INTEGRAL CABLE
ASSEMBLY
FLOWTUBE ASSEMBLY,
INCLUDES INTEGRAL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
13
MI 019-222 221
Table 83 - Parts for Remote Mounting (Sanitary Flowmeter only)
1 Below 1 Housing
K0171BW Housing, 1/2 NPT, AL
K0171BV Housing, M20, AL
2 X0174EK 1 Screw, But hd 8–32 x 0.25
3 D0197PS 1 Anti-Rotation Clip
4 X0174GF 2 Screw, Potting Cup
5 Below 1 Potted Cup Assembly
K0168GJ Potted Cup Assembly, I.S.
K0168MW Potted Cup Assembly, EX.
6 X0114AT A/R Grease

7 K0168GG 1 Neck Cup, Mach
8 X0144KW 1 Neck O-Ring
9 B1270KE A/R Thread Sealant

10 K0149HR 1 Remote Bracket
11 D0114SM 1 U-Bolt, Bracket, Remote
12 K0148TQ 1 Jam Nut
13 X0104CT 2 U-Bolt Nuts
222 MI 019-222
Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts

Figure 131 - Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts
1 2
5
6
9
7
10
11
Table 84 - Parts for Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Replacement Kits
1 Housing; see Electronics Housing, page 216
2 Junction Box; see Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 219
3 B1270KE A/R Thread Sealant

4 Bonnet Assembly, Standard or Extended Temperature Range (bonnet for extended
temperature range shown); see Bonnet Assemblies, page 224 for part numbers
5 X0114AT A/R Grease; 14 ounce can
MI 019-222 223
Table 84 - Parts for Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Replacement Kits (Continued)
6 Below — Bonnet Bolts (also part of Item 7)
X0173SV 4 Standard Temperature, ASTM A193, Grade B7, plated steel.

Hexhead (0.625 hex); 0.437-14 x 2
X0174EY 4 Extended Temperature, ASTM A453, Stainless Steel,

grade 660. Hexhead 0.625 hex); 0.437-14 x 2
7 Sensor Replacement Kit, Standard or Extended Temperature Range (extended temperature

range sensor shown); items 3, 8, 9, 10, and 11, plus instructions; see Sensor and Seal
Replacement Kits, page 225 for part numbers
8 n/a O-Ring
9 n/a Sensor
10 n/a Gasket
11 n/a Flow Dam
Bonnet Assemblies
The bonnet assembly is a pressure containment component. Replacement of this
component requires pressure testing. Refer to MI 019-223.
Table 85 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CF and 84CN Flowmeters with
Temperature Compensation
Standard Temperature Extended Temperature
ATEX, CSA,
Line Size Non- Non- FM/CSA
Explosion- IECEx, and
Code Explosion- Explosion- Explosion-
proof Certs NEPSI
proof Certs proof Certs proof Certs Flameproof
Certs
008 to 030 K0168GM K0168HR K0168HK K0168HJ K0168HM
040 to 120 K0168HQ K0168HS K0168HL K0168HH K0168HN
Table 86 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CW Flowmeters with

Line Size Code Non- Non-

Explosionproof Explosionproof
Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0170AS K0170AQ K0170AW K0170AX
040 to 080 K0170AT K0170AR K0170AY K0170AZ
Table 87 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CF and 84CN Flowmeters
without Temperature Compensation

Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0152TV K0152TW K0156JY K0156JW
040 to 120 K0152TX K0152TY K0156JZ K0156JX
224 MI 019-222
Table 88 - Bonnet Assembly Part Numbers for 84CW Flowmeters without


Certs Certs
Certs Certs
008 to 030 K0147GU K0147GT K0147GY K0147GX
040 to 080 K0148SK K0148SH K0148TM K0148TL
Sensor and Seal Replacement Kits

The sensor replacement kits are pressure containment components. Replacement of
these components requires pressure testing. Refer to MI 019-223.
NOTICE
• Do not use these kits for flowmeters that were purchased with the -H oxygen
service cleaning option. These require special cleaning. Contact Global
Customer Support for assistance.
• Do not use these kits for sanitary flowmeters. Sensors in sanitary flowmeters are
not user replaceable. Contact Global Customer Support to return the entire
flowmeter for repair or replacement.
• Do not use these kits to replace a gold-plated sensor. Contact Global Customer
Support for assistance.
Table 89 - Sensor Replacement Kits for 84C Flowmeters with Temperature

Compensation
Kit Description Kit Contents
Part No. Sensor Code Sensor Seal Kit101

K0169AD D K0168FT
K0169AC F K0168FR
K0168RJ
K0169AB R K0168FP
K0169AA S K0168FM
K0169AF A, E K0168GC K0168RL
K0169AE B, G K0168GB K0168RK
Table 90 - Seal Kit Contents for 84C Flowmeters with Temperature

Compensation
Seal Kit Contents

Seal Kit Part No. O-Ring or Grafoil
Gasket Flow Dam Bonnet Bolts (4)
Seal
K0168RJ X0145CM L0121DT L0112KT X0173SV
K0168RL K0146PT K0148VB
K0168RD X0174EY
K0168RK K0146HL K0148VA
101. See the next table for seal kit contents.
MI 019-222 225
Table 91 - Sensor Replacement Kits for 84C Flowmeters without Temperature

Compensation
Kit Description Kit Contents
Part No. Sensor Code Sensor Seal Kit102

K0161FL D K0148JK
K0161FK F K0148JJ
K0161EY
K0161FJ R K0148JH
K0161FH S K0148JG
K0161FN A, E K0148KQ K0161FA
K0161FM B, G K0148KN K0161EZ
Table 92 - Seal Kit Contents for 84C Flowmeters without Temperature

Compensation
Seal Kit Contents

Seal Kit Part No.
O-Ring Gasket Flow Dam Bonnet Bolts (4)
K0161EY D0100RP L0121DT L0112KT X0173SV

K0161FA K0146PT K0148VB
K0147CC X0174EY
K0161EZ K0146HL K0148VA
102. See the next table for seal kit contents.
226 MI 019-222
Optional Cable Selections -P and -R

Cable connector options -P and -R are for use with Electrical Housing Codes T and R
(1/2 NPT) only, and are available with Electrical Safety codes YY and ZZ only.
Figure 132 - Optional Cable Selections -P and -R

HAWKE-TYPE TRUMPET-TYPE
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND (PG 11)
1 OPTION -P 3 OPTION -R
2
PG11
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
CABLE CABLE
GLAND GLAND
Table 93 - Parts for Optional Cable Selections -P and -R
1 N7141HX 1 Hawke-Type Cable Gland (Option -P)
2 N7141KR 1 Adapter, 1/2 NPT to PG 11 (Part of Option -R)103
3 N7000AA 1 Trumpet-type Cable Gland — PG 11 (Part of Option -R)103
103. Option -R (Items 2 and 3) should be ordered as a set.
MI 019-222 227
Tamper-Resistant Cover for Bonnet Bolts (Option -S)
228 MI 019-222
Recommended Spare Parts Summary

Number of Parts
Item Recommended for
Part Number Part Name
No. 20
1 Inst. 5 Inst.
Inst.
See Electronics Housing, page 216
4 X0201FC O-Ring, Cover 2 4 8
5 Below Electronics Module Assembly 0 0 1
K0168GF HART Communication and 4 to 20 mA Output (Version -T)
K0168RS Low Power with HART Communication; Output Fixed at 10 mA (Version -L)
D0219DB Modbus Communication (Version -M)
9 K0149GV Digital Indicator/Configurator Replacement Kit 0 0 1
10 D0162WM Screw, Cover Lock104 2 4 8
12 Potted Cup Assembly Module; see Potted Cup Assembly Part Numbers, page 218 1 2 4
13 X0144KW O-Ring, Housing Neck 1 2 4
See Junction Box and Remote Mounting, page 219
3 Below Preamplifier Assembly 0 1 1
D0159SX Standard Temperature Remote
D0159SZ Extended Temperature Remote
6 D0179EG O-Ring, Cover; for Connection Head Assembly 1 2 4
See Bonnet Assembly and Sensor Parts, page 223
7 Sensor Replacement Kit, Standard or Extended Temperature Range; includes a sensor, seal kit; and 1 2 4
instructions; see Sensor and Seal Replacement Kits, page 225 for part numbers
104. Two cover lock screws are used with Electrical Safety Codes H, B, and S (ATEX, IECEx, and NEPSI flameproof units).
MI 019-222 229
Schneider Electric Systems USA, Inc.
70 Mechanic St.
Foxboro, MA 02035
United States of America
1-866-746-6477 inside the U.S.
1-508-549-2424 outside the U.S.
pasupport.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.
© 2015 – 2022 Schneider Electric Systems USA, Inc. All rights reserved.
MI 019-222

mi_019-222_n

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

mi_019-222_n

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

mi_019-222_n

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intelligent Vortex Flowmeters

Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety

Location of Pressure and Temperature Taps.....................................................42

Configuration Example ................................................................................. 109

Optional Cable Selections -P and -R.............................................................. 227

MI 019-222 Model 84C with HART Communication or Low Power

MI 019-179 Flow Products Safety Information (ATEX and IECEx)

Figure 1 - Sample Model Code

Parameter HART Analog or Digital Multidrop Mode

Communication Format • Analog 4 to 20 mA with HART superimposed

Remote Configurator/Communicator HART communicator or PC-based configurator

Communication Rate 1200 baud

Measurement Update 5 times/s

Raw Pulse Measurement Update Vortex Shedding Frequency

With HART, digital multidropping — the connection of multiple transmitters to a single

Table 2 - Operating Limits

Influence Operating Limits

Process Fluid liquid, gas, and steam

Process Temperature for Standard Temperature Flowmeters

(Only available for sanitary flowmeter body)

Process Temperature for Extended Temperature Flowmeters

Ambient Temperature (Housing)2

With local display -20 and +80°C (0 and 176°F)

Without local display -40 and +80°C (-40 and +176°F)

Relative Humidity 0 and 100%

With Electronics Version -T (HART Communication) 15.75 and 42 V dc3

With Electronics Version -L (Low Power) 10 and 42 V dc4

Flowmeter Output Response Time (Without Damping)

Pulse Output • Raw mode: Vortex shedding frequency

Table 4 - Flowmeter Outputs

Output Type Description

Digital Digital information is superimposed on a 4 to 20 mA output signal (standard

Pulse Output Specifications

Power Supply Requirements

Figure 2 - Supply Voltage vs Output Load for 4 to 20 mA Output

Low Power (Electronics Version -L)

5. See Electrical Certifications, page 29

Nominal Flow Velocity Limits

Standard Temperature Range7 High Temperature Range8

Lower 3.0/√ρf 2.5/√ρf 6.0/√ρf 5.0/√ρf

Upper 300/√ρf 250/√ρf 300/√ρf 250/√ρf

Process Temperature Effect on K-Factor

Static Pressure Limits

Minimum Static Pressure

Maximum Static Pressure

Minimum Back Pressure (Volatile Liquids or Low Pressure

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

Norm Normalized (0-1) No restriction

Table 6 - Absolute Pressure Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

Paa pascals absolute No restriction

psia pounds per square inch absolute No restriction

Table 7 - Temperature Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

degF degrees Fahrenheit No restriction

degR degrees Rankine No restriction

Table 8 - Density Units

Unit Description Fluid Restriction

kg/l kilograms per liter No restriction